Nicolet Integra Manual

Nicolet
TECHNOLOGIES
Integra Series
Digital Storage Oscilloscopes
Operation Manual
Version 2.01
PN 269-929004
Nicolet Instrument Technologies

5225 Bldg. #4 Verona Road Madison, Wisconsin USA 53711
Tel: (608) 276-5600 Fax: (608) 273-5061
Integra Series Operation Manual
Contents
Inspection/Warranty
1 Getting Started
2 DSO Features
3 The Menus
4 Verification Procedures
A1 Screen Messages
A2 Specifications
A3 Waveform File Specifications
A4 RS423 to PC Interfacing
A5 Connector Pinouts
A6 Disassembly Instructions
A7 LRU Lists
Contents
Inspection/Warranty
Getting Started 1
DSO Features 2
The Menus 3
Verification Procedures 4
Screen Messages A1
Specifications A2
Waveform File Specifications A3
RS423 to PC interfacing A4
Connector Pinouts A5
Disassembly Instructions A6
LRU Lists A7
Chapter 1: Getting Started Chapter 2: DSO Features

1.1 Safety and Power Requirements 1 2.1 DSO FEATURES 25
1.1.1 Symbols and Terms 1 2.1.1 The Live Button 25
1.1.2 International Safety Warnings 1 2.1.2 The Hold Last Button 25
1.1.3 Safety Statement 4 2.1.3 The Hold Next Button 26
1.1.4 Grounding 4 2.1.4 The Hold Mode 26
1.1.5 Live Parts 5
1.1.6 Environment 5 2.2 Guarding Stored Data 27
1.1.7 Power and Frequency Requirements 5 2.3 Display Modes 27
1.1.8 EMC 6 2.3.1 Refresh Mode 27
1.1.9 Fuse Requirements 6 2.3.2 Roll Mode 27
1.2 Using the Buttons 11 2.3.3 XY Mode 27
2.3.4 Persistence Mode 27
1.3 Start-Up Display 11
1.3.1 Cancel Button 11 2.4 Cursors 28
1.3.2 Cold Boot 11 2.4.1 Cursor and Reference Selection 28
2.4.2 The Cursor and Reference Lines 28
1.4 Obtaining a Trace 12 2.4.3 Making Measurements 28
1.4.1 Auto Setup 12
1.4.2 Manually Obtaining a Trace 13 2.5 Plot 29
2.5.1 Internal Thermal plotter 29
1.5 Channel Controls 13 2.5.2 Thermal Plotter Paper 29
1.5.1 Channels and Traces 14 2.5.3 Loading 30
1.5.2 Coupling 14
1.6 Horizontal Adjustments 14 Chapter 3: The Menus
1.6.1 Timebase Control 15
1.6.2 Store Length & Sample Rate 15 3.1 The Menus 31
1.6.3 Aliases 16 3.1.1 Definitions 31
1.6.4 Equivalent Time Sampling 16 3.1.2 Entering User Names or Numbers 31
1.6.5 Index 16 3.1.3 Menus 31
1.6.6 Zoom 17 3.1.4 The Main Operation Buttons 31
1.6.7 External Clock 17 3.1.5 Menu On/Off 31
1.7 Vertical Adjustments 18 3.2 Main Menu 32
1.7.1 Volts/Division 18
1.7.2 Position 18 3.3 Acquisition Menu 32
1.7.3 Zoom 18 3.3.1 50 Ohm Select Menu 32
1.7.4 Trace Separation 18 3.3.2 Bandwidth & Calibration Menu 32
3.3.3 Channel Scaling Menu 33
1.8 Trigger Control 19 3.3.4 Scaling 35
1.8.1 Selecting Trigger Source 20 3.3.5 Channel Offsets Menu 35
1.8.2 Trigger Coupling 20 3.3.6 Glitch Detect 36
1.8.3 Trigger Level (Integra 60) 20 3.3.7 Averaging Menu 37
1.8.4 Trigger Level (Integra 10, 20, 40) 20 3.3.8 Persistence Menu 37
1.8.5 Trigger Slope 21
1.8.6 Trigger Mode 21 3.4 Sweep Length Menu 38
1.8.7 Trigger Output 21
3.5 Trigger Menu 39
1.9 Trigger Delay 21 3.5.1 Trigger Modes 40
1.9.1 Pretrigger 22 3.5.1.1 Edge Trigger 41
1.9.2 Delay by Time 22 3.5.1.2 Dual Slope Trigger 41
5.5.1.3 Band Trigger 41
1.10 Operating Hints 23
v
3.5.1.4 Pulse Width Trigger 42 3.12.3 Measurement Modes 80

3.5.1.5 Frequency/Period Trigger 42 3.12.4 Measurements Display 80
3.5.1.6 Skew Trigger 43 3.12.5 Measurement Resolution (Time). 80
3.5.1.7 Missing Event Trigger 43 3.12.6 Measurement Units 80
3.5.1.8 Combination Trigger 44 3.12.7 Using Measurements 80
3.5.1.9 A Delayed by Time Gates B Trigger 45 3.12.8 Plotting Measurements 81
3.5.1.10 Delay by N Trigger 46
3.5.1.11 Divide by N Trigger 46 3.13 YT Measurements and Operators 82
3.5.1.12 B Gates A Delayed by N Trigger 47 3.13.1 Cursor Position 82
3.5.1.13 A Delayed by N Gates B Trigger 47 3.13.2 Top/Base 82
3.5.1.14 TV Trigger 48 3.13.3 Amplitude 83
3.13.4 Peak-to-Peak 83
3.6 Timebase Menu 49 3.13.5 Max/Min 83
3.13.6 Risetime/Falltime/Pulse width 83
3.7 Display Menu 51 3.13.7 Overshoot/Preshoot 83
3.7.1 Current Status Menu 52 3.13.8 Frequency/Period/Duty Cycle 83
3.8 Utility Menu 52 3.13.9 RMS/AC RMS 84
3.8.1 I/O Setup Menu 53 3.13.10 Area 84
3.8.1.1 RS423 Setup Menu 54 3.13.11 Trigger 84
3.8.1.2 GPIB Setup Menu 54 3.13.12 Constant 84
3.8.2 Test Limits Menu 55 3.13.13 Rising/Falling Crossing 84
3.8.3 Preferences Menu 55 3.13.14 Knee 85
3.8.3.1 Display Color Menu 56 3.13.15 Sum/Delta 85
3.8.3.1.1 Customize Color Menu 57 3.13.16 Ratio 85
3.8.3.2 Options Configuration Menu 57 3.13.17 Multiply 85
3.8.3.3 Set Time and Date Menu 58 3.13.18 Average 85
3.8.3.4 Graticule Menu 59 3.13.19 Logarithm/Antilog 86
3.8.4 Plot Configuration Menu 59 3.13.20 Cosine 86
3.8.4.1 Plot/Print Driver Menu 60 3.13.21 Mean 86
3.8.4.2 Direct Recording to Internal Plotter 61 3.13.22 Count 86
3.13.23 FFT Harmonic 86
3.9 Sequence Menu 63 3.13.24 Reference 86
3.9.1 Sequence Setup 64 3.13.25 Dimensioned Constant 86
3.9.2 Editing or Learning a Sequence 65
3.14 XY Measurements and Operators 86
3.10 Trace Analysis Menu 67 3.14.1 Cursor X, Y 87
3.10.1 Analysis Functions Menu 67 3.14.2 Cursor t 87
3.10.2 Source Trace Menu 68 3.14.3 Radius 87
3.10.3 FFT Parameters Menu 69 3.14.4 Angle 87
3.10.4 Graph Parameters Menu 70 3.14.5 Area 87
3.10.5 Histogram Parameters Menu 71 3.14.6 Integration With Respect to x 87
3.14.7 Constant 87
3.11 Save/Recall Menu 72 3.14.8 Operators 87
3.11.1 Storage Devices 73
3.11.1.1 File names 74 3.15 Trace On/Off Menu 88
3.11.2 Direct Recording to Hard Disk 75 3.15.1 Main & Zoom mode 88
3.15.2 Main Only and Zoom Only modes 88
3.12 YT Measurements. 78
3.12.1 Measurement Parameters 78
3.12.2 Standard Parameters 78
vi
Chapter 4: Integra Verification Procedure Appendix 4: Interfacing the DSO to an IBM-

4.1 Integra 10, 20 and 40 Verification PC via the RS423 (RS232)
Procedure 89 Interfacing the DSO to an IBM-PC via the
4.1.1 Recommended Intervals 89 RS423 (RS232) 116
4.1.2 Traceability 89
4.1.3 Test Conditions 89
4.1.4 Required Equipment 89
Appendix 5: Connector Pinouts and Driver
4.1.5 Units Conversion Formulas 89 Circuits
4.1.6 Warm-up 89 Connector Pinouts and Driver Circuits 117
4.1.7 Initial Control Settings 89
Driving the External Clock Input 117
4.1.8 Default Front Panel States 90
External Clock 117
4.1.9 Measurement Techniques 90
+5 V on I/O Connector 117
4.2 12-Bit Performance Testing 91
4.2.1 DC Gain Error Test 92
4.2.2 Common Mode Rejection (Differential Appendix 6: Disassembly Procedures
Models Only) 92
4.2.3 Bandwidth 93 Disassembly Procedures 118
93 Integra Disassembly 118
4.2.4 Procedure for the Integra 10, 20 and 40 93 Overview 118
4.2.5 RMS Noise 94 Cover Removal Procedure 118
Fan Removal Procedure 118
4.3 Integra 60 Verification Procedure 94 GPIB Board Removal Procedure 118
4.3.1 Bandwidth 94 Processor Board Removal Procedure 118
4.3.2Trigger Sensitivity 94 ADC Board Removal Procedure 119
4.3.3 Trigger Bandwidth 95 Front Panel Removal Procedure 119
4.3.4 Timebase Calibration 95 Power Supply Removal Procedure 119
4.3.5 Vertical Calibration 95
Appendix 7: Integra Series LRU Lists
Appendix 1: Screen Messages
Integra Series LRU Lists 120
Screen Messages 96 Integra 10 120
Integra 15 and Integra 20 121
Appendix 2: Specifications Integra 40 121
Integra 60 121
Specifications 100 Integra XY Option 121
The Integra Family of High Resolution Integra Thermal Writer (Option T) 122
Transient and Recording DSOs 100 Integra Battery Backed RAM (Option R) 122
Integra 10 101 Integra Option P 122
Integra 15 102 Integra Option K 122
Integra 20 104 Integra Option H 122
Integra 40 107 Integra GPIB (Option G) 122
Integra 60 109 Integra Floppy (Option F) 122
Integra Differential Inputs (Option D) 122
Appendix 3: Waveform File Specifications Integra 2M RAM (Option 2M) 122
Integra 1M RAM (Option 1M) 122
Waveform File Specifications 112 Integra Thermal Plotter Paper 122
File Header 112
Data Type 112
Actual Data 112
Time Domain Waveform Data Fields 113
vii
Receiving IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY

AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
Unpack the instrument and save the carton and packing ANY OTHER OBLIGATIONS OR LIABILITIES ON THE
material in case the instrument must be shipped to another PART OF NICOLET WHETHER IN CONTRACT, WAR-
site or returned to the factory for service. RANTY, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE. NICOLET
SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR AND DISCLAIMS ALL
CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL AND CONTINGENT
Inspection
DAMAGES.
Inspect the exterior of the instrument for any visible signs of
Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of
damage that may have occurred during transit.
implied warranties or limitation of liability for incidental or
If damaged, contact - consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion
may not apply to you.
Nicolet Instrument Technologies
Customer Service
5225-4 Verona Road Items Not Covered by Warranty
Madison, Wisconsin 53711 We do not warrant uninterrupted or error-free operation of
Telephone 608/276-5600 a product.
FAX: 608/273-5061 We provide certain non-Nicolet products on an “as is” basis.
Outside the U.S., call your local Nicolet office or distributor. Non-Nicolet manufacturers or suppliers may provide their
own warranties to you.
Nicolet System Warranty Separate software warranty is provided with software user
documentation.
Nicolet warrants that each product we sell you is free from
Note: For G.S.A. customers, (U.S. only) the standard G.S.A.
defects in labor and materials and shall conform to its
one year warranty applies.
product specifications as defined in the product user docu-
mentation.
If the product does not function as warranted during the Nicolet Software Warranty
warranty period, we will repair or replace it without charge. Nicolet warrants that the removable physical media (e.g.
If in our judgment we are unable to do so, you may return it diskettes) shall be free of defects in labor and materials for
to us and we will refund your money. a period of ninety (90) days from the invoice date. If the
physical media is defective, Nicolet will replace it without
Warranty Period charge.
This is your sole remedy for product defects. In no event will
The warranty period for new products sold inside the U.S.A.
Nicolet’s liability exceed the price paid for the software,
is 12 months from the date of invoice.
regardless of the form of the claim.
The warranty period for products sold outside the U.S.A. is
Nicolet does not warrant that the software be uninterrupted
12 months from the date of installation or 14 months from the
or error-free.
date of shipment, whichever is less.
NICOLET MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTY, EX-
Limit of Warranty
PRESSED OR IMPLIED WITH RESPECT TO THIS SOFT-
Misuse, accident, modification, unsuitable physical or oper- WARE, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANT-
ating environment, improper maintenance, or damage caused ABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PUR-
by a product for which we are not responsible may void the POSE. NICOLET MAKES NO WARRANTY EITHER
warranty. EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO THE
Certain components may have separate warranty periods as QUALITY OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
stated in the product user documentation. Consumables are NICOLET SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR CONSEQUEN-
not covered under warranty. TIAL, INCIDENTAL AND CONTINGENT DAMAGES.
THIS WARRANTY REPLACES ALL OTHER WAR-

RANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING THE
viii
Software Copyright Protection

This software is protected by state, U.S. and international
copyright treaty provisions. These copyright provisions
apply to your use of this software regardless of whether or
not you agree to the following terms. Under law, copyright
infringers may be liable for actual damages sustained by the
copyright owner and for punitive damages of up to $100,000
per infringement. Unauthorized copying of computer/in-
strument software, and attempts to do so, are also criminal
violations, with penalties that may exceed $100,000 in fines
and 10 years in prison.
1. Unless restricted by an agreement with Nicolet, you are
permitted to:
a. Use this software on only one computer/instrument
and by one user at a time.
b. Make one copy of this software, provided that:
(i) the copy is created as an essential step in
the utilization of this software in conjunction
with your machine and that it is used in no other
manner, or
(ii) that the copy is for archival purposes only and that
all archival copies are destroyed in the event that
your continued possession of this software should
cease to be rightful.
c. Sell this software, or any archival copy, only as part
of the sale of all of your rights in this software, except
that adaptations may be transferred only with the
authorization of Nicolet.
2. You are not permitted to:
a. Make copies of this software or documentation,
except as described above.
b. Alter, modify or adapt this software or documenta-
tion, except as described above.
c. Distribute, lease, rent or sublicense this software or
documentation.
ix
Blank page.
x
1.1 Safety and Power Requirements 1.1.2 International Safety Warnings
1.1.1 Symbols and Terms Danish
This symbol is used to denote the measurement SIKKERHEDSADVARSEL

ground connection. This point is not a safety Dette instrument skal anvendes med en
ground. beskyttelsesjordforbindelse via netkablets jordledning til
jordforbindelsen i instrumentets apparatkontakt eller – hvis 1
This symbol is used to denote a safety ground instrumentet er forsynet dermed – via
connection. sikkerhedsjordklemmen. Enhver afbrydelse af
sikkerhedsjordforbindelsen vil formentlig gøre instrumentet
berøringsfarligt. Bevidst afbrydelse er forbudt. Hvis et
Where caution is required, this symbol refers the indgangssignal overstiger 40 V spidsværdi, skal en ekstra
user to the operator manual for further information. signal jord forbindes.
See section 1.1 to section 1.1.8.
Dækslerne må ikke fjernes.
This symbol warns the user that high voltages are
present close to this symbol. Afbryd instrumentet fra lysnettet ved at fjerne IEC-stikket
fra bagpanelet. Dette instruments AC netafbryder er kun
This symbol shows that the switch is a standby beregnet til funktionelle formål. Den er hverken beregnet til
switch. When it is pressed the instrument state eller egnet til afbrydelse af lysnettet.
toggles between operating and stand by mode. In Nederlands
stand by mode some power will be consumed and
the instrument is NOT disconnected from the AC VEILIGHEIDSWAARSCHUWING
supply. Dit instrument mag uitsluitend worden gebruikt als een
beschermende massa (aarde) is aangesloten via de
WARNING statements identify conditions or practices beschermende massageleider van de voedingskabel, of –
that could be dangerous or fatal to indien het instrument daarvan is voorzien – via de veiligheids-
personnel. massa-aansluiting. Als de beschermende massa, binnen of
CAUTION statements identify conditions that could buiten het instrument, wordt onderbroken, dan kan dat
cause damage to the instrument or other hierdoor uitermate gevaarlijk worden. Het opzettelijk
property. onderbreken van de massa, is verboden. Indien er een
signaal wordt aangeboden van meer dan 40 V (top-top) dan
400 V peak (≤100 V CAT I) This statement shows that the dient eveneens de signaal aarde aangesloten te zijn.
instrument’s signal inputs may be connected to
CAT I supplies whose peak voltage is not likely De deksels nooit verwijderen.
to exceed 400 V. CAT I supplies are signal level Als de IEC-aansluiting op het achterpaneel uit het stopcontact
supplies typically found within equipment on the wordt verwijderd, zal het instrument niet langer zijn
secondary side of an AC supply transformer. aangesloten op de wisselstroom-voeding. De wisselstroom-
This symbol is used to denote features and controls of voedingsschakelaar op dit instrument is uitsluitend bestemd
10 the Integra 10. Paragraphs and illustrations marked voor functionele doeleinden. Die schakelaar mag nooit
with this symbol pertain to the Integra 10 only. worden gebruikt om het instrument aan of af te zetten.
This symbol is used to denote features and controls of
15 the Integra 15. Paragraphs and illustrations marked Suomi
with this symbol pertain to the Integra 15 only.
TURVAOHJEITA
This symbol is used to denote features and controls of
20 the Integra 20. Paragraphs and illustrations marked Tätä laitetta käytettäessä sen tulee olla suojamaadoitettu
with this symbol pertain to the Integra 20 only. joko verkkojohdon suojajohtimen tai erillisen
suojamaadoitusliitännän kautta, mikäli laitteeseen on
This symbol is used to denote features and controls of sellainen asennettu. Suojamaadoituksen katkaiseminen
40 the Integra 40. Paragraphs and illustrations marked laitteen sisä-tai ulkopuolelta tekevät siitä vaarallisen.
with this symbol pertain to the Integra 40 only. Tahallinen katkaisu on kiellettyä. Lisäksi, jos jokin
This symbol is used to denote features and controls of tulosignaaleista ylittää 40 V peak, on signaalimaa kytkettävä.
60 the Integra 60. Paragraphs and illustrations marked
with this symbol pertain to the Integra 60 only.
1
Älä poista suojakansia. Italiano

Erottaaksesi tämän laitteen käyttöjännitteestä irrota AVVISO DI SICUREZZA
takapaneelissa oleva IEC-liitin. Tämän laitteen
Questo strumento deve esser utilizzato con un collegamento
verkkokytkimellä on ainoastaan toiminnallinen tarkoitus.
protettivo di messa a terra tramite il filo di messa a terra del
Sitä ei ole tarkoitettu, eikä se sovellu laitteen erottamiseen
cavo di alimentazione o tramite il terminale di messa a terra
käyttöjännitteestä.
in sicurezza, nel caso in cui lo strumento ne sia dotato.
1 Français Qualsiasi interruzione della massa a terra protettiva, sia
all’interno che all’esterno dello strumento, lo renderà
ATTENTION - DANGER!
pericoloso. E’vietata qualsiasi interruzione causata
Cet appareil doit impérativement être mis à la masse par le intenzionalmente. Inoltre, la connessione di terra deve essere
conducteur de terre du câble d’alimentation ou, si l’instrument collegata se ad uno qualsiasi degli ingressi viene applicato
en comporte une, par la borne de terre. Il peut être dangereux un segnale superiore a 40 V di picco.
en cas de coupure du circuit de terre, que ce soit à l’intérieur
Non aprire lo strumento.
ou à l’extérieur de l’instrument. Il est formellement interdit
de couper intentionnellement le circuit de terre. De plus, une Per disinnestare questo strumento dall’alimentazione a
masse signal doit être connectée si l’un quelconque des corrente alternata, levare il connettore IEC che si trova sul
signaux d’entrée dépasse 40 V crête. pannello posteriore. L’interruttore dell’alimentazione a
corrente alternata di questo strumento viene fornito
Ne pas déposer les panneaux de protection.
esclusivamente per scopi operativi e non viene inteso, né è
Pour couper l’alimentation secteur de cet instrument, adatto, per essere utilizzato come dispositivo di disinnesto.
débrancher le cordon secteur monté à l’arrière. L’interrupteur
d’alimentation est purement secteur fonctionnel. Il ne s’agit
pas d’un dispositif de coupure du courant, et n’est pas conçu Αγγλικ ά
pour cette fonction.
ΠΡΟΕΙ∆ΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ ΑΣΦΑΛΕΙΑΣ
Το όργανο αυτό πρέπει να λειτουργεί µε το
Deutsch προστατευτικό γείωσης (γείωση) να έχει συνδεθεί
µέοω του προστατευτικού αγωγού γείωσης του
WARNHINWEIS! καλωδίου που χορηγείται ή µε τον ακροδέκτη
Dieses Gerät muß mit einer Schutzerde betrieben werden, ασϕαλείας που είναι για τη γείωση, εάν υπάρχει
die über den Schutzleiter des Speisekabels oder über die τοποθετηµένος στο όργανο τέτοιος ακροδέκτης.
∆ιακοπή της προστατευτικ ής γείωσης, εσωτερικα ή
Erdungsklemme des Gerätes (falls vorhanden) anzuschließen
εξωτερικά του οργάνου ενδεχοµένως να κάνει το
ist. Bei einer Unterbrechung der Schutzerde außerhalb oder όργανο επικίνδυνο. ∆ιακοπή εκ προθέσεως
innerhalb des Gerätes kann eine Gefahr am Gerät entstehen! απαγορε ύεται.
Eine beabsichtigte Unterbrechung ist nicht zulässig. Achtung!
Bei Signalspannungen über 40 V muß die Signalmasse Μην αϕαιρείτε τα καπάκια.
angeschlossen sein. Για ν’απσυνδέσετε το όργανο από την ηλεκτρική
Die Schutzabdeckung nicht entfernen. παροχή, τραβηξτε να βγει ο συνδετηρας ΙΕC από το
πίσω ταµπλω. Η ηλεκτρικός διακόπτης που υπαρχει
Zum Trennen des Gerätes von der Wechselstromversorgung σ’αυτό το όργανο είναι µόνο για λειτουργικές
den IEC-Stecker von der Rückwand abziehen. Der αν άγκες. ∆εν προτίθεται, ή δεν είναι κατάλληλος,
Wechselstromversorgungs-Schalter dient bei diesem Gerät σαν µέσο αποσύνδεσης.
nur für Funktionszwecke. Er ist nicht als Trennvorrichtung
bestimmt bzw. geeignet!
2
Norsk Svenska
ADVARSEL! SÄKERHETSVARNING
Dette instrumentet må bare anvendes så lenge det er jordet Detta instrument måste drivas med en skyddande jordledning
via den beskyttende jordlederen i strømkabelen, eller via ansluten via den skyddande jordledaren på matarkabeln
jordingsklemmen, hvis instrumentet har en. Eventuelle eller, om instrumentet har sådan monterad, via det jordade
forstyrrelser i den beskyttende jordingen, inne i eller utenfor uttaget. Om jordanslutningen störs, inuti eller utanför
instrumentet, vil sannsynligvis gjøre instrumentet farlig. instrumentet, är det troligt att instrumentet kommer att
1
Forsettlig forstyrrelse er forbudt. I tillegg, signal jord må utgöra en fara. Avsiktlig störning är förbjuden. Dessutom
tilkobles dersom inngangs signalet overstiger 40 V spissverdi. måste en signaljord anslutas om någon av ingångssignalerna
överstiger 40 V topp.
Ikke fjern dekslene
Tag ej bort skydden.
Skal instrumentet koples fra vekselstrømtilførselen, kopler
man ut IEC-koplingen bak på panelet. Vekselstrømbryteren För att koppla bort instrumentet från växelströmstillförseln,
på dette instrumente tjener kun en funksjonell hensikt. Den tag ut IEC-anslutningen på bakpanelen. Strömställaren för
er ikke egnet, og må ikke brukes, som skillebryter. växelströmstillförsel på detta instrument är enbart till för
funktionerliga ändamål. Den är inte avsedd som, eller lämplig
som, en bortkopplingsanordning.
Português
Aviso de segurança
English
Este aparelho deve ser operado com uma ligação terra ligado
SAFETY WARNING
por um conductor trifásico do cabo principal ou, se o
instrumento já tiver um, via um terminal de segurança. This instrument must be operated with a protective ground
Qualquer interrupção do trifásico, dentro ou fora do aparelho, (earth) connected via the protective ground conductor of the
pode tornar o aparelho perigoso. É proibida a interrupção supply cable or, if the instrument is fitted with one, via the
intencional. Nota: O terminal de terra deve ser ligado se o safety ground terminal. Any interruption of the protective
sinal de entrada a medir for superior a 40 V de pico. ground, inside or outside the instrument, is likely to make the
instrument dangerous. Intentional interruption is prohibited.
Não retire o invólucro/capas.
In addition, a signal ground must be connected if any input
Para desconectar este aparelho da fonte AC, retire o conector signal exceeds 40 V peak.
IEC do painel trazeiro. Neste aparelho, o interruptor da fonte
Do not remove the covers.
AC existe sómente por razões funcionais. Não deve ser
usado e nem é apropriado como dispositivo de desconexão. To disconnect this instrument from the AC supply, unplug
the IEC connector on the rear panel. The standby switch on
this instrument is provided for functional purposes only. It is
Español not intended as, or suitable as, a disconnecting device.
ADVERTENCIA SOBRE SEGURIDAD
Este instrumento debe utilizarse conectado a tierra a través GÜVENLİK UYARISI
del conductor de puesta a tierra del cable de alimentación o Bu cihaz, koruma topraklaması besleme kablosunun
de la borna de seguridad, si dicho instrumento estuviera topraklama iletkeni yoluyla ya da eğer varsa cihazın
equipado con ella. Cualquier interrupción de esta puesta a koruma topraklama terminali yoluyla bağlanmış olarak
tierra, dentro o fuera del instrumento, hará que el manejo del çalıştırılmalıdır. Koruma topraklamasının cihaz içinde veya
mismo resulte peligroso. Queda terminantemente prohibido dışında kesintiye uğraması cihazın tehlikeli hale gelmesine
dejar en circuito abierto dicha puesta a tierra. Además, debe yol açar. Bağlantıyı bilerek kesintiye uğratmak yasaktır.
conectarse una señal de tierra si cualquier señal de entrade Buna ilaveten, herhangi bir giriş sinyali 40 V tepe değerini
sobrepasa los 40 V de pico. geçerse giriş sinyali topraği bağlanmalidir.
No quite las tapas. Kapakları çıkarmayınız.
Para desconectar este instrumento de la red, desenchufe el Bu cihazı AC kaynağından ayırmak için arka paneldeki
conector IEC del panel trasero. El interruptor de entrada de IEC konektörünü yuvasından çıkarınız. Bu cihaz
CA (encendido) se incluye solo para fines funcionales. No üzerindeki AC güç şalteri sadece işlevsel nedenlerle
sağlanmıştır. Cihazı elektrik kaynağından ayırma amacını
está pensado para utilizarse como medio de desconexión, ni
taşımaz ve bu amaçla kullanılmaya uygun değildir.
tampoco es adecuado para ello.
3
1.1.3 Safety Statement

WARNING: Any interruption of the protective ground
The design of this instrument has been checked to EN 61010 conductor inside or outside the instrument
for class 1 (grounded) use. is likely to make the instrument dangerous.
Intentional interruption is prohibited.
This manual contains information and warnings that must be
observed to keep the instrument in a safe condition. The Signal connections to the instrument should be connected
instrument should not be switched on if it is damaged and it after the ground connection is made and disconnected before
1 should not be used under wet conditions. the ground connection is removed, i.e. the supply lead must
be connected whenever signal leads are connected.
For the correct and safe use of this instrument it is essential
that both operating and service personnel follow generally
WARNING: It is recommended that signal grounds are
accepted safety procedures in addition to the safety always connected to a local ground. For
precautions specified in this manual. safety, it is essential that a signal earth is
Whenever it is likely that safety protection has been impaired, connected whenever voltages greater than
40 V peak are connected. This is to prevent
the instrument must be made inoperative and be secured
the instrument’s case becoming live in the
against any unintended operation. Qualified maintenance or event of a safety ground interruption, which
repair personnel should be informed. Safety protection is could occur if the supply connector is
likely to be impaired if, for example, the instrument shows accidentally disconnected from the rear of
visible damage or fails to operate normally. the instrument.
This instrument must not be used in life support roles. It is the responsibility of the user to ensure the safety of any
accessories, such as probes, used with the instrument.
1.1.4 Grounding CAUTION: Even low voltage inputs may contain high
voltage fast transients (spikes) which could
The instrument must be operated with a protective ground damage the input. For this reason it is not
connected via the yellow/green conductor of the supply safe, for instance, to make direct
cable. connections to an AC line supply.
This ground is connected to the instrument before the line CAUTION: The outers of the input BNCs are connected
and neutral connections, when the supply plug is inserted to the oscilloscope’s chassis and therefore
into the socket on the back of the instrument. If the final to the safety ground.
connection to the supply is made elsewhere, ensure that the Note: In order to verify the continued safety of this
ground connection is made before line and neutral. equipment, it is necessary to routinely check the
earth bonding and insulation resistance. This should
be done by a suitably qualified person.
4
1.1.5 Live Parts 1.1.7 Power and Frequency Requirements

The covers protect the user from live parts and they should The instrument uses less than 250 W/350 V.A and operates
be removed only by suitably qualified personnel for mainte- from line voltages of 90–132 V at 45–400 Hz and 180–
nance and repair purposes. 264 V at 45–65 Hz to Installation Category II, local level
supplies distributed within a building. Under the extreme
The instrument must not be operated with covers removed.
conditions of 90 V and 45 Hz, the instrument will still
operate correctly even if there is a half cycle dropout in the 1
1.1.6 Environment line supply.
The instrument should preferably be operated in a clean, dry The power connection is via a standard IEC, CEE 22
environment with an ambient temperature of between 0 °C connector. Before connecting the instrument to the supply,
and +50 °C. (+35 °C for thermal plotter). ensure that the rear panel AC supply voltage selector is set
to the appropriate voltage, either 115 V or 230 V.
The instrument is specified for use in a Pollution Category
II environment, which is normally non–conductive with The AC supply fuse must be changed to suit the supply
temporary light condensation, but it must not be operated voltage as shown in Table 1.1.9. Access to the AC supply
while condensation is present. It should not be used in more fuse can only be made if the AC supply connector is
hostile, dusty or wet conditions. removed.
The instrument will operate with full, specified accuracy To disconnect this instrument from the AC supply, unplug
between +15 °C and +35 °C. the IEC connector on the rear panel. The instrument should
be positioned to allow access to the AC connector. The
Note: Direct sunlight, radiators and other heat sources standby switch on this instrument is not a disconnecting
should be taken into account when assessing the device. When the instrument is in standby mode, some
ambient temperature.
power will still be consumed.
The instrument relies on forced air cooling via a fan and
ventilation slots. Adequate ventilation can usually be achieved
by leaving a 75 mm (3" gap) around the instrument. Care
should be taken to avoid restricting the airflow around the
fan holes at the side of the instrument.
To clean the instrument, disconnect all power sources and
then wipe the surfaces lightly with a clean, soft cloth damp-
ened with water.
5
1.1.8 EMC 1.1.9 Fuse Requirements

EMC stands for Electro-Magnetic Compatibility. The over- The fuse arrangement shown in Table 1.1.9 must be fol-
all intention is that electronic equipment must be able to co- lowed. The fuses should be slow blow (T) types.
exist with other electronic equipment in its immediate vicin-
ity and neither emit large amounts of electromagnetic en-
ergy nor be susceptible to the prevailing electromagnetic Table 1.1.9 Fuse ratings
1 energy. Thus, there are two distinct requirements for electro-
magnetic compatibility – emission and immunity. Supply Slow Blow (T) Suggested Types
Voltage Fuse Rating Manufacturer/
This instrument generates, accepts and can radiate radio IEC (UL) Type No.
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance
with this operation manual, may cause harmful interference 230 V 2A Bussman/S505,
to other equipment. However, there is no guarantee that HBC Littlefuse/215002,
interference will not occur in a particular installation. Schurter/SPT0001,
2507 Wickman/19181
Immunity tests: All immunity tests are done with the failure
criterion being a change of the instrument’s control settings. 115 V 4A Bussman/GMC
Any of these tests may produce a spurious trigger. Measure-
ments are not valid during and immediately after the immu-
nity tests.
In demanding applications, if this instrument does cause
minor harmful interference to other equipment, which can
be determined by turning this instrument off and on, you are
encouraged to try to reduce the interference by one or more
of the following measures:
• Re-orient or relocate the affected equipment.
• Increase the separation between the instrument and the
affected equipment.
• Re-orient or relocate RS423 and/or IEEE-488 interface
cables.
• Connect the instrument to an outlet on a different supply
circuit to the affected equipment.
Supply cables, interface cables and probes should be kept as
short as practical, preferably a maximum of 1 m. Interface
cables should be screened and interface cables longer than
3 m are not acceptable in terms of interface port immunity.
6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Index Acquisition
Cancel Menus Hold Hold
Auto
Setup Save Last Live Next
Save Plot Main Recall Measure
21
CURSORS TRIGGER TIME
Select Trace Trigger Position S/s 22
Arm Level
s/Pt
(Enter) Sens
Trgd 23
Zoom
Line Ext
Cursor CH3 CH4 DC AC Norm +
24
Ref CH1 CH2 LF HF Auto
Figure 1.2a Controls on the Integra 10

1 2 3 4
Main
Position Position Zoom
Position Position
27
Trace
On/Off 28
Menu V/DIV V/DIV V/DIV V/DIV
DC DC DC DC 29
Gnd Gnd Live Ref Gnd Gnd
On/Off Ref AC Ref AC Ref AC Ref AC
30
31
! ! ! ! !
1V
EXT Cal 32
CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4 0V
ON / STANDBY 1M 240 V RMS (CAT
39 38 37 36 35 33
40
(1) Menu Selection buttons (16) Level/Sens button (31) Reference button
(2) Auto Setup button (17) Trigger Position rocker switch (32) Calibration signal
(3) Cursor buttons (18) Hold Last button (33) Channel Input BNC
(4) Cursor/Reference button (19) Live button (35) Trace On/Off button
(5) Cancel button (20) Hold Next button (36) Live/Ref button
(6) Save button (21) Trigger Source button (37) Main/Zoom button
(7) Index rocker switch (22) External Trigger (38) External Trigger Input BNC
(8) Plot button Coupling button (39) Menu On/Off button
(9) Select Trace (Enter) button (23) Auto/Norm button (40) On/Standby button
(10) Trigger LED (24) Timebase and Horizontal
(11) Arm LED Zoom knob
(12) Main menu button (27) +/– Slope button
(13) Save/Recall menu button (28) Position knob
(14) Measure menu button (29) V/Div and Vertical Zoom rocker switch
15
10
(15) Trigger Level knob (30) DC/Gnd/AC button
7
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Index Acquisition
Cancel Menus
Auto Hold Hold
21
Select Trace
Arm Level
Trigger Position S/s
s/Pt
22
(Enter) Sens
Trgd 23
Zoom
Cursor
Line
CH3 CH4
Ext
DC AC Norm + A Main
24
Ref CH1 CH2 hf rej Auto B Aux
25
1 2
Main
3 4 26
Position Position
27
Trace
On/Off 28
+ + + +
Menu V/DIV
DC DC
V/DIV
DC DC
V/DIV
DC DC
V/DIV
DC DC 29
Gnd Gnd Gnd Gnd 1-4 5-8 Gnd Gnd Gnd Gnd
On/Off Ref AC AC Ref AC AC Ref AC AC Ref AC AC
30
Auxiliary
Channels
31
! - ! + - ! + - ! + - ! +
1V
EXT Cal
0V
32
CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4
ON / STANDBY 1M 240 V RMS (CAT 1)
39 38 37 36 35 34 33
40
(1) Menu Selection buttons (16) Level/Sens button (29) V/Div and Vertical Zoom rocker switch
Figure 1.2b Controls on the Integra 20

(2) Auto Setup button (17) Trigger Position rocker switch (30) DC/Gnd/AC button
(3) Cursor buttons (18) Hold Last button (31) Reference button
(4) Cursor/Reference button (19) Live button (32) Calibration signal
(5) Cancel button (20) Hold Next button (33) Positive Input BNC
(6) Save button (21) Trigger Source button (34) Negative Input BNC
(7) Index rocker switch (22) External Trigger (35) Trace On/Off button
(8) Plot button Coupling button (36) Auxiliary Channels button
(9) Select Trace (Enter) button (23) Auto/Norm button (37) Main/Zoom button
(10) Trigger LED (24) Timebase and Horizontal (38) External Trigger Input BNC
(11) Arm LED Zoom knob (39) Menu On/Off button
(12) Main menu button (25) Main/Aux Timebase button (40) On/Standby button
20
(13) Save/Recall menu button (26) A/B Trigger button
(14) Measure menu button (27) +/– Slope button
(15) Trigger Level knob (28) Position knob
8
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Index Acquisition
Cancel Menus
Auto Hold Hold
21
Select Trace Trigger Position S/s
Arm Level
s/Pt
22
(Enter) Sens
Trgd 23
Zoom
Line Ext
Cursor CH3 CH4 DC AC Norm + A
24
Ref CH1 CH2 hf rej Auto B
Figure 1.2c Controls on the Integra 40

1 2 3 4 26
Main
Position Position
27
Trace
On/Off 28
Menu V/DIV
+ V/DIV
+ V/DIV
+ V/DIV
+
DC DC DC DC DC DC DC DC 29
Zoom Zoom Zoom Zoom
Gnd Gnd Gnd Gnd 1-4 5-8 Gnd Gnd Gnd Gnd
On/Off Ref AC AC Ref AC AC Ref AC AC Ref AC AC
30
31
! - ! + - ! + - ! + - ! +
1V
EXT Cal
0V
32
CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4
ON / STANDBY 1M 240 V RMS (CAT 1)
39 38 37 36 35 34 33
40
(1) Menu Selection buttons (16) Level/Sens button (30) DC/Gnd/AC button
(2) Auto Setup button (17) Trigger Position rocker switch (31) Reference button
(3) Cursor buttons (18) Hold Last button (32) Calibration signal
(4) Cursor/Reference button (19) Live button (33) Positive Input BNC
(5) Cancel button (20) Hold Next button (34) Negative Input BNC
(6) Save button (21) Trigger Source button (35) Trace On/Off button
(7) Index rocker switch (22) External Trigger (36) Trace Control button
(8) Plot button Coupling button (37) Main/Zoom button
(9) Select Trace (Enter) button (23) Auto/Norm button (38) External Trigger Input BNC
(10) Trigger LED (24) Timebase and Horizontal (39) Menu On/Off button
(11) Arm LED Zoom knob (40) On/Standby button
(12) Main menu button (26) A/B Trigger button
(13) Save/Recall menu button (27) +/– Slope button
(14) Measure menu button (28) Position knob
40
(15) Trigger Level knob (29) V/Div and Vertical Zoom rocker switch
9
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 18 19 20
Index Acquisition
Cancel Menus Hold
Auto Hold
21
Select Trace
Arm
Trigger Position S/s
s/Pt
22
(Enter)
Trgd 23
Zoom
Cursor
Line Ext
CH3 CH4 DC AC Norm + A
24
Ref CH1 CH2 LF HF Auto B
1 2
Main
3 4 26
Position Position
27
Trace
On/Off 28
V/DIV
Menu V/DIV
Zoom DC
V/DIV
Zoom DC Zoom DC
V/DIV
Zoom DC 29
Gnd Gnd 1-4 5-8 Gnd Gnd
On/Off Ref AC Ref AC Ref AC Ref AC
30
31
! ! ! ! !
1V
EXT
TRIG
50Ω 50Ω 50Ω 50Ω Cal 32
CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4 0V
ON / STANDBY 1 MΩ 10 pF ≤400Vpk (≤100V CAT 1) 1 MΩ 10 pF ≤400Vpk (≤100V CAT 1) 50Ω ≤ 5V RMS
39 38 37 36 35 33
40
(1) Menu Selection buttons (17) Trigger Position rocker switch (31) Reference button
(2) Auto Setup button (18) Hold Last button (32) Calibration signal
Figure 1.2d Controls on the Integra 60

(3) Cursor buttons (19) Live button (33) Channel Input BNC
(4) Cursor/Reference button (20) Hold Next button (35) Trace On/Off button
(5) Cancel button (21) Trigger Source button (36) Trace Control button
(6) Save button (22) External Trigger (37) Main/Zoom button
(7) Index rocker switch Coupling button (38) External Trigger Input BNC
(8) Plot button (23) Auto/Norm button (39) Menu On/Off button
(9) Select Trace (Enter) button (24) Timebase and Horizontal (40) On/Standby button
(10) Trigger LED Zoom knob
(11) Arm LED (26) A/B Trigger button
(12) Main menu button (27) +/– Slope button
(13) Save/Recall menu button (28) Position knob
60
(14) Measure menu button (29) V/Div and Vertical Zoom rocker switch
(15) Trigger Level knob (30) DC/Gnd/AC button
10
1
1.2 Using the Buttons 2V OFF OFF OFF 50µs

Numbers shown in brackets in the text refer to the controls
shown in Figures 1.2a and 1.2b.
Controls on the instrument front panel include buttons,
rocker switches, and knobs.
There are two types of buttons on the instrument. The first 1
type usually has only one function – when pressed, that one
function is activated, i.e. Live (19). See Figure 1.2a. The
second type are toggles – each press of the button either
switches something on or off, i.e. the Reference button
(31), or selects the next item in a sequence, i.e. the DC/GND/
AC button (30). See Figure 1.2b.
Rocker switches provide multiple functions in one control.
For example, each channel has a rocker switch to select the
appropriate voltage sensitivity by either incrementing or Figure 1.3 Start-Up Display
decrementing the input voltage range. Furthermore, when
zoom is selected via the Main/Zoom button (37), this same The trace is visible across the center of the screen. At the top
control varies the expansion or contraction of the waveforms is the sensitivities per division of the input channels and the
in the vertical direction. timebase speed per division. If any channel is inactive,
information for that channel is not displayed. If the unit has
Knobs provide two functions by rotating clockwise or coun- previously been used, the trace may not be visible as the
terclockwise. For example, each channel has a knob or instrument will remember and return to the previous setup.
Position knob (28) to vertically reposition a waveform on
the screen. Turning the knob clockwise causes the waveform Users with no previous experience of a Digital Storage
to move upward on the screen. Turning the knob counter- Oscilloscope (DSO) will find that it responds like a conven-
clockwise causes the waveform to move downward on the tional Real Time Oscilloscope, while it is repetitively trig-
screen. gered, but in the absence of further valid triggers, it retains
the last trace for continuous display.
1.3 Start-Up Display

1.3.1 Cancel Button
When first switched from standby mode using the On/
Standby button (40) (power switch), the instrument dis- To exit a procedure that locks out the front panel, i.e., GPIB
plays an information page for approximately 5 seconds and remote control, press the Cancel button (5) on the front
then shows display information similar to that shown in panel.
Figure 1.3.
The information page shows the instrument’s bandwidth, 1.3.2 Cold Boot
maximum sample rate, samples per channel and software
To initialize the instrument into a default setup or when the
version number. instrument appears to operate abnormally, performing a
"cold boot" is recommended. To perform a "cold boot",
press and hold the Hold Next button (20) and press the On/
Standby button (40). Continue to hold down the Hold Next
button (20) until you hear two beeps. The instrument then
restarts and resets to default mode.
11
1.4 Obtaining a Trace AUTO SETUP will attempt to arrange the display so that
two to five complete cycles appear, with the amplitude set so
Whenever the DSO is switched on, the control settings that that the height of the trace is between two and five screen
were present at power down are used. These may not suit the divisions.
current input signals. The instrument can be set to suit new
signals either manually or automatically using the Auto 2V OFF OFF OFF 50µs
Setup feature.
1
Auto
Setup 2
Menu
On/Off
Figure 1.4.1 An Auto Setup Display
!
The lowest channel number with a valid input signal takes
EXT
priority for triggering and timebase selection.
ON / STANDBY
Some input signals are unsuitable for use with the Auto
Figure 1.4 Obtaining a Trace Setup routines, see Section 1.10.7. If Auto Setup is unable to
set the instrument to suit the input signal, it may display the
message:
1.4.1 Auto Setup NO VALID INPUT
To display an input signal, connect it via any of the Channel This message tells you that the input signal is not repetitive,
Input BNCs (33) and/or (34) and press the Auto Setup has a frequency which would require a slower timebase
button (2). outside the Auto Setup range, has too large an amplitude, or
is not suitable for another reason.
The instrument responds with the message:
PRESS AGAIN TO AUTOSETUP
To proceed with the Auto Setup, press the Auto Setup
button (2) again. Pressing any other button will prevent auto
setup from occurring.
CAUTION: Signals connected to the input socket
should not be more than ± 400 V peak.
Larger signals could cause damage to the
internal circuitry.
Assuming a regular signal has been applied, for example a
2 kHz sine wave with an amplitude of 5 V peak to peak, Auto
Setup sets the instrument to show the sine wave on the
display. An example is shown in Figure 1.4.1.
12
1.4.2 Manually Obtaining a Trace 1.5 Channel Controls

This section describes how to obtain a trace without using
Auto Setup.
1
Position
You may need to consult other sections of this manual for 29 28
descriptions of the operating features.
1. Decide which channel the input signal is to be applied. - Single 1
CH1, CH2, CH3 or CH4.
Ended
CAUTION: Signals connected to the input socket V/DIV
Input DC
should not be more than ± 400 V peak.
Gnd
Larger signals could cause damage to the
31 Ref AC 30
internal circuitry.
2. Apply the signal through a BNC connector to the chosen
channel’s Input BNCs (33) and/or (34).
3. Set the DC/Gnd/AC button (30) to either AC or DC as
appropriate. 1
4. Ensure that the chosen channel will be displayed by Position
29 28
setting the appropriate trace to match the channel using
the Trace on/off button (35).
5. Set the Main/Zoom button (37) to Main. Differential
6. Adjust the Timebase and Horizontal Zoom knob (24) to Input V/DIV - +
DC DC
provide a timebase of 100 ms/div (as shown in the top
Gnd Gnd
right corner of the display).
31 Ref AC AC 30
7. Set the A/B Trigger button (26) (Integra 20 only) to A
and the trigger Auto/Norm (23) to Auto.
8. Use the Trigger Source button (21) to select the re-
quired source for the trigger signals. If using external Figure 1.5 Channel Controls
triggering, Set the External Trigger Coupling button
(22).
9. Ensure that trigger delays (or pretrigger) are set to zero
using the Trigger Position rocker switch (17).
10. Select the Live button (19).
11. If necessary, adjust the position of the trace using the
Position knob (28) and Trigger Position rocker switch
(17) so that the trace is in a convenient position on the
display.
12. Adjust the gain of the chosen channel using the V/Div
and Vertical Zoom rocker switch (29).
13. Adjust the timebase setting using the Timebase and
Horizontal Zoom knob (24).
14. If the display is unstable, adjust the Trigger Level knob
(15) and Level/Sensitivity button (16) for a stable
trigger, indicated by the Trgd light.
13
1.5.1 Channels and Traces 1.6 Horizontal Adjustments

On the Integra series of instruments there are 4 input CHAN-
TIME
NELS and up to 8 display TRACES. For details on vertical
adjustments, see Section 1.7.
10 S/s
s/Pt
The traces are displayed objects and the channels are ac-
1 quired objects. The instrument always acquires all four input 15
channels although they are not necessarily displayed. Zoom 24
Each trace may have two views, a MAIN view and a ZOOM
view.
40
A trace may display either a live channel, a recalled trace or
a manipulated channel or trace, e.g. trace 5 could be a live 60
FFT of channel 3.
The content of each trace, which traces are displayed and the TIME
zoom/main settings are controlled by the Trace On/Off S/s
button (35), and the Trace Analysis Menu. The Trace s/Pt
Analysis menu can be accessed two ways. Either press the

Trace On/Off button (35) twice or press the Main menu 20
Zoom 24
button (12) and select the corresponding Trace Analysis
Main
menu button on the front of the display. In addition, the
Aux
position and amplitude of each of the eight traces on the
display can be individually controlled using the 4 sets of
Position knobs (28) on the front panel together with the
Live/Ref button (36) on the Integra 10 or Auxiliary Chan- Figure 1.6a Horizontal Controls
nels button (36) on the Integra 20, 40 and 60.
1.5.2 Coupling
These buttons control the type of coupling between the input
signal and the instrument. DC is the most generally appli-
cable, and Auto Setup will normally set this control to DC
where possible.
AC: This is used to remove any DC component from input
signals. Suitable input signals are from 4 Hz to the maxi-
mum bandwidth of the instrument.
Gnd: The input signal is internally disconnected from the
inputs and the input amplifier grounded. A 0 V reference
signal is displayed.
DC: The input signal is directly coupled to the instrument so
that all frequency components of the input signal are dis-
played. The bandwidth is from DC to the maximum band-
width of the instrument.
14
The DSO’s timebase is controlled by the Timebase and 1.6.1 Timebase Control
Horizontal Zoom knob (24).
The Timebase and Horizontal Zoom knob (24) controls the
Each trace can be displayed as a main and/or a zoom trace. sample rate (in Samples/second, seconds/Point or timebase
To display zoom traces, press the Main/Zoom button (37) in seconds/division) of the incoming data. Turning the
to illuminate Main and Zoom or just Zoom. timebase knob counterclockwise decreases, the sample rate.
The DSO’s zoom factor is controlled by the Timebase and Turning the timebase knob clockwise, increases the sample
Horizontal Zoom knob (24) when the Main/Zoom button rate. To select the units (samples/sec or sec/point), see 1
(37) is in Main/Zoom or Zoom only mode. Otherwise the Section 3.6.
Timebase and Horizontal Zoom knob (24) controls the The timebase selected is shown at the top right-hand corner
main timebase. of the display in time/division. The sample rate or time per
Main: Main only. Each trace is the acquired, recalled or point is shown via the LED readout above the timebase knob
manipulated signal suitably compressed to display the com- in either Samples/sec or sec/Point respectively (depending
plete waveform. on the display mode currently selected).
Main & Zoom: Two traces are displayed, a main trace and Attempting a decrease in sample rate lower than the avail-
a zoomed trace. The main trace is the complete signal and the able limit results in an external clock signal being selected.
zoom trace is a zoomed picture of the main display at the See Section 1.6.6.
current Zoom factor setting. The maximum sample rate available depends upon the
Zoom: Zoom Only. A zoomed picture of the main trace is Integra model you are using.
displayed at the current Zoom setting.
Both Main and Zoom display traces are derived from the 1.6.2 Store Length & Sample Rate
same single acquisition. The Main and Zoom traces may The instrument displays 501 points per horizontal sweep,
appear superimposed on the display. They can be separated therefore there are 50 points per display division.
using the Position knob (28) as described in Section 1.7.2.
For the main trace in 500 sample mode, all sample points are
Note: Zoom traces are a “window” onto a bigger trace and displayed, but in 5 k and 50 k sample modes with glitch
cannot exist without the original trace. If the acquired detection off (Integra 20, 40 and 60 only) and max/min off,
store is overwritten or modified, then the zoom trace every tenth or hundredth sample is displayed. To view the
will also be modified. captured trace in greater detail and examine all the acquired
sample points, the zoom trace feature should be used. See
Sections 1.6 and 1.6.5.
Main
Main
&
Zoom
Zoom
Figure 1.6b Zoom Windows
15
1.6.3 Aliases 1.6.4 Equivalent Time Sampling

If a 2 kHz signal is applied when the timebase is set to The five fastest ranges are produced by Equivalent Time
500 ms/div, an interesting phenomenon may appear – an 60 Sampling on the Integra 60. This is a technique whereby a
‘alias’. complete trace is built up by sampling a number of acquisi-
tions at various times relative to the trigger point. Clearly for
An alias is a false image. The instrument is a digital oscillo-
this scheme to produce meaningful traces the input signal
scope and takes frequent samples of the input signal in order
1 to update the trace. If the signal frequency is higher than the
must be repetitive and have a stable trigger.
sample frequency, one sample will be taken from a particular The number of acquisitions required to build up a trace is
point on the waveform and the next sample may be taken variable, but in general the faster timebases require more
from a point slightly further along on a subsequent cycle. It captures.
will then display the wave as being much slower than it really
The fastest timebase, 10 ns/div, is equivalent ot a sampling
is. See Figure 1.6.3. This effect occurs if the sample rate is
rate of 5 GS/s, giving 50 samples per cycle on a 100 MHz
less than twice the frequency of the input signal.
input signal.
Sample Actual Signal The use of ETS allows captures with pretrigger. See Section
1.9.1.
In 500 sample mode, the timebase sequence is:
200 s to 500 ns Transient capture
200 ns to 10 ns ETS repetitive sampling
ETS ranges should only be used to caputre and display single
or nonrepetitive events as well as repeating waveforms.
1.6.5 Index
Illusory Image
The function of the Index rocker switch (7) applies to the
Figure 1.6.3 Alias Generation Main/Zoom and Zoom Only display modes.
When the instrument is in Main and Zoom mode, the Index
There is a max/min glitch detection feature that can be used rocker switch (7) moves the highlighted portion left or right
to detect aliases. With dot join on, this usually results in a along the main trace, selecting the portion of the trace to be
filled-in wave envelope being seen on the screen, indicating zoomed. As the highlighted portion moves, the zoom trace
a high frequency. See Section 3.2.1 display also moves such that the zoom trace is always that
portion of the main trace that is highlighted.
When the instrument is in Zoom only mode, the rocker
switch has the same effect on the zoom traces as when the
instrument is in Main and Zoom. It selects the part of the
main trace that is zoomed and displayed.
The position of the cursor (Section 2.3) is fixed in relation to
the sample points so it will move with the traces. With some
displays, such as zoomed traces (Section 1.6.5), the cursor
can be off the part of the trace displayed on the screen. To
bring it back into view use the Cursor buttons (3).
16
1.6.6 Zoom 1.6.7 External Clock

When in Zoom or Main and Zoom mode, the Timebase and To use an external clock as the timebase, turn the Timebase
HorizontalZoomknob (24) switches the zoom factors through and Horizontal Zoom knob (24) counterclockwise until EXT
a sequence. The expansion factors available vary depending appears on the display.
upon the store length in use;
The external clock TTL input is on the rear panel D–type
Store Zoom factors available: connector. The input should be correctly driven as described
in Appendix 5.
1
2M x2, ..., x2000, x5000, x10000, x20000, x40000
CAUTION: Signals connected to the external clock
1M x2, ..., x2000, x5000, x10000, x20000 input should be TTL level signals. RMS
200 k ×2, ×5, ×10, ×20, ×50, ×100, ×200, ×500, ×1000, voltages greater than 20 V could cause
×2000, ×4000 damage to the internal circuitry.
50 k ×2, ×5, ×10, ×20, ×50, ×100, ×200, ×500, ×1000 When using an external clock, the signal is reclocked by the
oscilloscope at 30 MHz to synchronize the clock with the
5k ×2, ×5, ×10, ×20, ×50, ×100 internal clocks. One sample is taken for each positive edge
0.5 k ×2, ×5, ×10 of the external clock signal and is within 33 ns of the positive
edge due to the reclocking.
When active, the selected zoom factor is applied to all
displayed zoom traces, which then expand the highlighted In Roll mode, the maximum frequency of the external clock
segment of the main trace display. is 100 kHz.
If the cursor is on, changing the zoom may cause the cursor In Refresh mode, the maximum frequency of the external
to move off the screen. It can be brought back into view using clock is 500 kHz. At slow clock rates the screen updates as
the Cursor buttons (3). data is acquired. As the clock rate increases, a complete store
is acquired before the data is transferred to the screen.
The instrument displays 50 dots (samples) per screen divi-
sion, with each displayed dot value being obtained from the
acquisition memory. With a 50 k acquisition and a zoom of
×100 there are, therefore, 50 acquired dots per division
displayed, i.e. every acquired sample is displayed.
If the zoom factor is increased, extra, interpolated samples
are displayed. The table below shows the interpolated zoom
factors.
Store Interpolated Zoom factors
200 k ×500,×1000, ×2000, ×4000
50 k ×200, ×500, ×1000
5k ×20, ×50, ×100
0.5 k ×2, ×5, ×10
17
1.7 Vertical Adjustments 1.7.2 Position
1 The Position knobs (28) move their respective traces up and

down the display relative to the graticule. This control
Position
28 moves both main and zoom traces at the same time.
29
If Hold Last is on, or a single shot capture has been made (see
Single Section 2.1) and a trace is subsequently shifted vertically,
1 Ended any part of the trace that was captured off the top or bottom
Input V/DIV
DC
of the screen is represented by a horizontal line.
Gnd When the trace is stored as described above, the position
31 Ref AC 30 control becomes a post storage shift control. When traces are
once more live, any previously applied post storage shift is
remembered and added as a pre-store offset. The overall
effect of this is transparent so the control appears to work at
1 all times as a vertical position control.
Position
29 28
1.7.3 Zoom
When the Main/Zoom button (37) is set to Zoom or Main
Differential and Zoom, a zoom factor is applied to the input signal in the
Input - + range of ×1⁄4 to ×32. Thus, with an initial setting of 1 V, the
V/DIV
DC DC
actual sensitivity of the channel could be set by this control
Gnd Gnd
AC AC between 0.25 V and 32 V per division. The V/Div and
31 Ref 30 Vertical Zoom rocker switch (29) is used to vary the zoom
factor, doubling the factor with each press.
In order to change the V/DIV setting, Zoom should be turned
Figure 1.7 Vertical Controls off. The range can then be changed using the V/Div and
Vertical Zoom rocker switch (29). When the required
There are four sets of vertical controls and eight display setting has been obtained, turn Zoom back on again and the
traces. The vertical controls either control traces 1 through V/Div and Vertical Zoom rocker switch (29) reverts to the
4 or 5 through 8 as set by the Live/Ref or Auxiliary Zoom control.
Channels button (36). Press this button once to change to
the other set of controls. When a channel Zoom is on, the Zoom light is illuminated
and the Trace alphanumeric display changes to show the
new sensitivity per division. The Channel alphanumeric
1.7.1 Volts/Division display is unchanged.
The V/Div and Vertical Zoom rocker switch (29) adjusts
the vertical sensitivity of the appropriate trace over discrete 1.7.4 Trace Separation
calibrated 1, 2, 5 steps.
To vertically separate Main and Zoom traces (see Sections
If Zoom or Main and Zoom mode is selected, then the V/Div 1.6 and 1.6.5), use the Position knob (28). This moves the
and Vertical Zoom rocker switch (29) varies the Y–zoom selected trace’s Zoom trace relative to its Main trace.
factor of the acquired signal. See section 1.7.3.
18
1.8 Trigger Control 15
The Integra has very comprehensive trigger facilities; those TRIGGER

discussed here are available directly from the front panel. 11 Trigger Position 17
Arm
For Integra systems with advanced trigger capabilities, the Level
comprehensive trigger menu is described in Section 3.9. 10 10

Trgd
Sens
Some Integra systems have two trigger systems on the Line Ext 1
instrument: A and B. Each trigger system has its own source, 15 CH3 CH4 DC AC Norm +
CH1 CH2 LF HF Auto
coupling, level , slope, and delay settings.
Assuming that the selected trigger system is not set to A gate
B, then a valid trigger signal will start channel sweeps and is
21 22 23 27
a single event. The trigger controls determine when an event
is recognized as a valid trigger. For further details on the
15
trigger system, see Section 3.9.
When the instrument is armed, the Arm LED (11) illumi- TRIGGER
nates, indicating that the system is ready to receive a trigger. 11 Trigger Position 17
Arm Level
When the instrument receives a valid trigger, the Trigger LED 20 10

Trgd
Sens
(10) briefly illuminates to indicate that the instrument is

triggered (Trgd). When a continuous sequence of valid triggers Line Ext
are received, the trigger LED is continuously illuminated. 40 CH3 CH4
CH1 CH2
DC AC
LF HF
Norm
Auto
+ A
B
The trigger point is indicated at the bottom of the display; the
trigger point of the main trace by a ‘M’ and the trigger point
of the Zoom trace by a ‘Z’. If either trigger point moves off
21 22 23 27 26
the display the symbol will become ←M,M→ or ←Z or Z→
as appropriate.
15
When the instrument is turned off, the current trigger set-
tings are retained and will be used on power up. TRIGGER
11 Trigger Position 17
Arm
The choice between selecting and adjusting the A or B
trigger is made with the A/B Trigger button (26) (Integra 10
Trgd
20, 40 and 60 only). 60
Line Ext
CH1 CH2 LF HF Auto B
21 22 23 27 26
Figure 1.8 Trigger Controls
19
1.8.1 Selecting Trigger Source 1.8.3 Trigger Level (Integra 60)

The Trigger Source button (21) determines the input The trigger level is set by the Trigger Level knob (15). This
source for the trigger circuit. Only one of the lights above the is a continuously variable control. An indication of the
source buttons will be illuminated to indicate the trigger trigger level relative to the displayed trace is shown by two
source. small horizontal bars, one at each side of the display, or if the
trigger level is off the screen, by two arrows indicating the
The trigger source can be any of the instrument’s input
1 channels, the AC line signal or an external signal.
relevant direction.
The trigger level bars give an approximation of the trigger
If Line is selected, the trigger circuitry synchronizes to the
level and should only be used as a guide to the trigger point.
line supply.
They are meaningful, with respect to the trace, unless the
The external trigger signal should be connected to the front channel is DC coupled with AC coupled triggering.
panel External Trigger Input BNC (38).
When the level control has been set so that valid trigger
When external trigger is selected, the trigger level is refer- signals are being detected, the appropriate Trig'd LED
enced to the center of the screen, i.e. if the coupling is DC lights up.
then the trigger is referenced to ground; if the coupling is AC
then the trigger is referenced to the center of the signal.
1.8.4 Trigger Level (Integra 10, 15, 20, 40)
The Integra series instruments incorporate a digital trigger
1.8.2 Trigger Coupling
with hysteresis that allows you to vary both the trigger level
The External Trigger Coupling button (22) selects the and sensitivity. This enables noise immunity and accurate
coupling used for the trigger signal. Each press of the button triggers. When using positive or negative slope triggers, the
moves the selection one step through the sequence: acquired signal must pass through two trigger levels in order
DC (no filter) to trigger the instrument and acquire data. The difference
DC HF (low pass at 15 kHz) between the two trigger levels is known as the sensitivity.
AC (high pass at 10 Hz) First, set the trigger sensitivity by pressing the Level/Sens
AC HF (band pass from 10 Hz to 15 kHz) button (16) until Sens is illuminated. Then, set the trigger
LF (high pass at 1 kHz) sensitivity using the Trigger Level knob (15). This is a
LF HF (band pass from 1 kHz to 15 kHz) continuously variable control. An indication of the trigger
sensitivity relative to the displayed trace is shown by two
The high frequency reject option switches in a low pass filter
set to 15 kHz. Using this filter is helpful in stabilizing the small horizontal bars near the left side of the display. The
trigger point on noisy input signals, although it may reduce vertical distance between the bars is the sensitivity. Turning
the Trigger Level knob (15) clockwise increases the verti-
the accuracy of the trigger point indicator at high sample
rates. cal distance between the horizontal bars, effectively increas-
ing the sensitivity. Turning the trigger knob counterclock-
wise decreases the vertical distance between the horizontal
bars, effectively decreasing the sensitivity.
To set the trigger level, press the Level/Sens button (16)
until the word Level is illuminated. Then, set the trigger level
using the Trigger Level knob (15). Both horizontal bars
near the left side of the display move together, with the
trigger level represented by the top horizontal bar.
The trigger level bar gives an approximation of the trigger
level and should only be used as a guide to the trigger point.
They are meaningful, with respect to the trace, unless the
channel is DC coupled with AC coupled triggering.
When the trigger levels have been set so that valid trigger
signals are being detected, the appropriate Trigger LED
(10) is illuminated.
Helpful Hint: To view the numerical trigger level and
sensitivity settings, press the Main Menu button (12).
Then, select the Display menu and select Status.
20
1.8.5 Trigger Slope 1.9 Trigger Delay

A trigger is generated when the selected source signal passes The acquired data position before, after and delayed from the
through the chosen trigger levels. This crossing point can be trigger point is controlled using the Trigger Position rocker
on either a rising or falling edge. The rising edge is consid- switch (17). See Figure 1.9. The amount of pretrigger or
ered to be a positive slope and the falling edge a negative delay is shown at the bottom of the trace display when the
slope. Trigger Position rocker switch (17) is pressed. Pressing
The trigger point can be selected to be on either the positive the rocker switch in the center defaults the system back to 1
going edge (+) or the negative going edge (–) by selecting the zero trigger delay.
required option using the +/– Slope button (27). Each Trigger delay is the time between a trigger event being
successive press of this button toggles between + and –. To detected and the first sample acquired.
select Dual Slope Trigger, see Section 3.5.1.2.
Note: If the trace has been X shifted or zoomed, the first
point on the display is not necessarily the first sample
1.8.6 Trigger Mode point of the acquisition.
The trigger system can operate in two modes; Auto or 15
Normal as selected by the Auto/Norm button (23).
TRIGGER
In Normal mode, display captures can only occur when a 11 Trigger Position 17
valid trigger signal has been received. Arm Level
In Auto mode, if no valid trigger signal has been received

10 10
Trgd
Sens
within 50 ms, the instrument automatically produces its own Line Ext
trigger signal and initiates a capture. This ensures that the
screen is constantly updated regardless of the input signal.
15 CH3 CH4
CH1 CH2
DC AC
LF HF
Norm
Auto
+
If valid triggers are received at a rate of approximately 25 Hz

or more, they will be used to start all captures and the
instrument will not generate its own triggers. 21 22 23 27
15
1.8.7 Trigger Output
TRIGGER
A TTL trigger output signal is provided on the rear panel D– 11 Trigger Position 17
type connector. With trigger delay, this signal indicates the Arm Level
start of the display sweep, i.e. the left-hand edge of the 20 10

Trgd
Sens
screen, and with pretrigger it indicates the trigger point. This

trigger signal is shown in Figure 1.9b. Line Ext
40 CH3 CH4
CH1 CH2
DC AC
LF HF
Norm
Auto
+ A
B
21 22 23 27 26
15
TRIGGER
11 Trigger Position 17
Arm
10
Trgd
60
Line Ext
CH1 CH2 LF HF Auto B
21 22 23 27 26
Figure 1.9a Trigger Delay Controls
21
1.9.1 Pretrigger 1.9.2 Delay by Time

Pretrigger is the ability to capture and display waveforms This feature is set by the Trigger Position rocker switch
that occur partly or wholly prior to the trigger point. (17). The delay time can be set to a resolution based on the
inverse of the maximum sample rate of the instrument. The
Pretrigger is given as a percentage of screen width and can
size of steps by which the delay can be increased or de-
be set from 0% to 100%. While adjusting the percentage, the
creased using the rocker switch is dependent on the current
adjustment briefly pauses at 10% and 50%. With 0% pretrig-
1 ger and no X–shift, the trigger point is at the left hand edge
timebase setting. Once set, the delay time remains the same
regardless of the selected timebase range.
of the screen and 100% pretrigger puts the trigger point at the
right-hand edge of the screen. Using the trigger menu, the delay can be set to any value
directly, regardless of the current timebase range.
The current amount of pretrigger is shown at the bottom of
the screen while being adjusted with the Trigger Position The minimum delay is zero when the trigger point is at the
rocker switch (17), and can also be viewed on the Current left-hand edge of the screen. The maximum delay is about
Status Menu (Section 3.6) and also altered on the Trigger 1000 s.
Menu (Section 3.9).
The current trigger delay setting is shown on the screen when
the Trigger Position rocker switch (17) is pressed. The
delay setting can also be viewed on the Current Status menu
(Section 3.6) and altered on the Trigger Menu (section 3.9).
Pre–Trigger
65%
pre–trig
Trigger output
Displayed Trace
No Trigger Delay
Trigger output
Trigger point
Delayed by time
Delay = 2ms
Trigger output
Figure 1.9b Trace Capture With Delay
22
1.10 Operating Hints 1.10.3 Problem:

This section explains how to perform a system reset and Trace off the top or bottom of the screen.
gives some of the more common problems in operating Too much vertical shift.
digital oscilloscopes, how to correct them, and a brief
explanation of what was wrong. You may need to refer to • Correct with that channel’s Position knob (28).
other sections of the manual to understand the operating Input has large DC offset.
features discussed here. 1
• AC couple the input signal using the DC/Gnd/AC button (30).
• Correct using the Position knob (28).
1.10.1 System Reset
• Select a less sensitive vertical range using the V/Div and
Should the system memory become corrupted, the instru- Vertical Zoom rocker switch (29).
ment could lock out the front panel operation or begin to
behave erratically. Since the internal system variables are
held in nonvolatile memory, turning the instrument off an on 1.10.4 Problem:
again may not clear them. In this unlikely event, a system Trace not being acquired.
reset may be necessary.
Instrument in single capture mode.
A system reset should only be used as a last resort as all the
internal memories are cleared, erasing all reference traces, • Press the Live button (19).
calibration details and setup details. Trigger level incorrect.
To initialize the instrument into a default setup or when the • Select Auto using the Auto/Norm button (23) and DC
instrument appears to operate abnormally, performing a trigger using the External Trigger Coupling button
"cold boot" is recommended. To perform a "cold boot", (22), then adjust the trigger level and sensitivity control
press and hold the Hold Next button (20) and press the On/ until the trigger level and sensitivity indicator bars are
Standby button (40). Continue to hold down the Hold Next lined up with the center of the trace.
button (20) until you hear two beeps. The instrument then
restarts and resets to default mode. Trigger source on the wrong input.
• Change the trigger source using the Trigger Source
button (21).
1.10.2 Problem:
Trigger coupling on an unsuitable setting.
Traces and alphanumerics very dim or completely disap-
peared. • Change trigger coupling using the External Trigger
Coupling button (22).
Intensities too low.
Long trigger delay set.
• Use the Display Color Menu (Section 3.18) to adjust the
various intensities. • Either wait for the delay to end or shorten the trigger delay.
Note: During long delays a countdown is displayed near
• Use the Auto Setup feature (monochrome instruments
the bottom of the screen.
only) to reset the intensities to their default levels.
Timebase on very slow acquisition.
• Adjust the horizontal timebase using the Timebase and Hori-
zontal Zoom knob (24).
23
1.10.5 Problem: 1.10.8 Problem:

Trace is unstable even when triggered. Cursor measurements apparently incorrect.
An alias appears. Wrong channel scaling selected.
• Check for the alias by selecting a faster timebase range and • Select correct channel scaling to suit signal in use (see
checking whether or not the display changes as expected. Section 3.4).
1 Noisy input. Cursors on wrong channel trace.
• Select HF triggering using the External Trigger Coupling • Position cursors on trace of interest using the Select Trace
button (22). (Enter) button (9).
• Adjust the trigger level using the Trigger Level knob (15).
Trigger on Auto. 1.10.9 Problem:
• With very low frequency inputs (below 20 Hz), the Auto Single shot acquisition takes longer than expected.
setting initiates triggers in addition to any input triggers. Averaging or persistence modes selected.
Select Norm trigger using the Auto/Norm button (23).
• Turn off both averaging and persistence.
An ETS timebase is in use with infrequent triggers.
1.10.6 Problem:
• Use the Timebase and Horizontal Zoom knob (24) to
Trace has very flat top or bottom.
change to a non ETS timebase.
Trace was captured when off screen vertically and position An ETS timebase is in use with nonrepetitive or nontriggered
shift has been used.
signal.
• Use less sensitive V/Div range when acquiring the trace.
• Change to a non ETS timebase.
• Reposition the trace prior to capture.
• Adjust the trigger controls to obtain a trigger signal.
1.10.7 Problem:
Auto Setup fails.
If Auto Setup fails, it is most likely that the signal connected
to the instrument is unsuitable for the automatic setup
system for one or more of the following reasons.
Signal not repetitive.
• Auto Setup only works on repetitive signals.
Signal amplitude too small or too large.
• Instrument cannot select a suitable V/Div range. Use a
suitable probe, i.e. ×1, ×10, ×100 or ×1000 to obtain a
signal level between 5 mV and 400 V
Signal frequency too slow or too fast.
• The signal frequency is outside the range of Auto Setup.
Signal not constant.
• Amplitude and/or frequency variations during the Auto
Setup routine may interfere with its correct operation.
High frequency noise on signal.
• The noise may be interpreted as a high frequency signal
instead of being ignored as noise on a lower frequency
signal.
24
2.1 DSO FEATURES 2.1.2 The Hold Last Button

This section of the operators manual explains in detail how How the Hold Last mode operates depends upon whether a
to use the various acquisition and display modes and the plot sweep is in progress when you press the Hold Last
output features of the instrument. It describes the controls button (18).
you use to capture live signals for display when a valid Sweep in Progress
trigger is received and then store the digitized data in
memory. If you press the Hold Last button (18) during a sweep
(Figure 2.1.2a):
1. The current sweep is allowed to finish.
2.1.1 The Live Button 2
2. The newly captured data is stored at the end of the sweep.
Press the Live button (19), which switches the instrument to
Live mode, to capture data each time a new sweep is 3. After the sweep is completed, no more sweeps can be
triggered (Figure 2.1.1). Newly captured data is displayed at triggered.
the end of each sweep.
Between Sweeps
Live Pressed If you press the Hold Last button (18) when the system is
trigger trigger trigger trigger between sweeps (Figure 2.1.2b):
sweep 1 sweep 2 sweep 3
Data captured Data captured Data captured
1. The data captured during the previous sweep is retained
Trigger ignored
for display.
Time 2. No more sweeps can be triggered.
Figure 2.1.1 The Live button (19) was pressed, thus
arming the instrument to start a sweep each time a
valid trigger is received.
Hold Last pressed

Live Pressed during sweep 2
trigger trigger trigger
sweep 1 sweep 2
Data captured Data captured
Trigger ignored
Time
Figure 2.1.2a: The Hold Last button (18) was pressed during the second sweep. The second sweep is allowed to
finish and the newly captured data remains displayed on the screen. No new sweeps can be triggered.
Hold Last pressed

Live Pressed between sweeps
sweep 1 sweep 2
Trigger ignored
Time
Figure 2.1.2b: The Hold Last button (18) was pressed between sweeps. Data captured during the second sweep
remains displayed on the screen. No new sweeps can be triggered.
25
2.1.3 The Hold Next Button 2.1.4 The Hold Mode

The Hold Next button (20) arms the system for one more Hold mode means that the Hold Last light is on and the Live
sweep. When this final sweep is finished: light is off. New sweeps cannot be triggered while the
system is in the Hold mode.
1. The newly captured data is displayed.
2. No more sweeps can be triggered.
Figures 2.1.3a, 2.1.3b and 2.1.3c show that, regardless of
when you press the Hold Next button (20), the system
allows only one more full sweep after receiving a valid
2 trigger. When the final sweep ends, no more sweeps can be
triggered.
Hold Next pressed
Live Pressed during sweep 1
sweep 1 sweep 2
Trigger ignored
Time
Figure 2.1.3a: The Hold Next button (20) was pressed during the first sweep while in the Live mode. The instrument
lets the first sweep finish and then waits for the next valid trigger to occur. When the trigger is received, the
instrument initiates a final sweep. Data captured during the final sweep remains displayed on the screen and the
system ignores all new triggers..
Hold Next pressed

Live Pressed between sweeps
sweep 1 sweep 2
Trigger ignored
Time
Figure 2.1.3b The Hold Next button (20) was pressed between sweeps while in the Live mode. This allowed the next
valid trigger to initiate a final sweep. When the sweep ends, all new triggers are ignored and the data captured
during the final sweep remains displayed on the screen.
Hold Next pressed

Hold Last pressed to arm the system
trigger trigger
sweep 1
Data captured
Trigger ignored
Time
Figure 2.1.3c The Hold Last button (18) was pressed between sweeps. Data captured during the second sweep
remains displayed on the screen. No new sweeps can be triggered.
26
2.2 Guarding Stored Data 2.3.2 Roll Mode

Important: Data stored in memory is lost if any of the This mode is like a chart recorder. The display scrolls from
conditions below occur. Therefore, you should immediately right to left until a trace has been acquired. New data is
store important data on disk as soon as possible to avoid written on the right–hand side of the display.
accidental loss. The scrolling effect is most noticeable on the slower timebase
Data stored in memory is replaced if any of these events ranges. The rolling display is frozen by the trigger in Hold
occur: Next mode but is unaffected by the trigger in Live mode.
a. The Live or Hold Next buttons are pressed and a new Roll is only available on timebases of 50 ms/div and slower.
sweep is triggered. If the timebase is faster than 50 ms/div, the display and 2
trigger systems behave as in refresh mode.
b. Power is removed from the instrument.
2.3.3 XY Mode
Acquisition
This mode allows the CH1 input to control the X (horizontal)
Hold Hold component of the trace, and the other channel inputs to
Last Live Next control the Y (vertical) component of the trace display.
XY is turned on and off from the Display Menu (see Section
3.5).
The display shows an XY display of the data captured by the
timebase and trigger systems. Main trace 1 is mapped
against Main trace 2, 3 & 4 and Zoom trace 1 is mapped
18 19 20 against Zoom trace 2, 3 & 4. Which XY maps are actually
displayed is determined by the display mode set with the
Figure 2.2 The Capture Controls Main/Zoom button (37), the traces that are on and the
settings in the Trace menu (see Section 3.39).
XY is available on all timebase ranges but the timebase
2.3 Display Modes should be set slow enough to capture the whole signal of
interest. This mode is useful for showing Lissajous’ figures.
There are four display modes on the instrument: Refresh,
Roll, Persistence, and XY. The first three of these are
mutually exclusive. XY can only be applied to refresh 2.3.4 Persistence Mode
modes. Refresh is available by pressing the Main menu
This is a refresh mode in which successive acquisitions are
button (12) and selecting the Display menu.
added to the current display. The number of acquisitions or
the time before clearing the display is set in the Persistence
2.3.1 Refresh Mode menu, which is accessed from the Acquisition menu via the
Main menu button (12). The latest acquisition is shown
The instrument imitates the style of a conventional real-time brighter than the persisted acquisitions (see Section 3.8).
oscilloscope and the display is plotted from left to right as it
is acquired, overwriting existing data. In refresh with On color instruments, there are two styles of persistence –
pretrigger, the display does not update until the pretrigger monochrome or color. In monochrome, persisted traces are
information has been acquired. This is only noticeable on displayed in the one persistence color set in the Display
slow timebases. Color menu. In color, persisted traces are displayed in their
own trace color.
27
2.4 Cursors CURSORS

The instrument allows you to take direct measurements from Select Trace
the screen display, using the reference and cursor lines. The
(Enter)
required measurements must be selected in the Measure- 9
ment menu (see Sections 3.12 and 3.13). Measurements are
made with respect to ground or to the horizontal reference
depending upon the measurement parameters selected. Cursor
Ref
2 2.4.1 Cursor and Reference Selection

The cursor and reference lines are switched on or off using 4
the Select Trace (Enter) button (9). Successive presses of
this button places the cursor and reference lines on to the
3
displayed traces in turn, i.e. Trace1Main (TR1M), Figure 2.4.3b The Cursor and Reference Line Controls
Trace1Zoom (TR1Z), Trace2Main, Trace2Zoom,
....Trace4Zoom, Off, Trace1Main, etc. If any of the traces
are not in use, the lines skip to the next valid selection. 2.4.3 Making Measurements
Note: If zoom, X shift or other trace manipulation feature When using the cursors, the Integra shows voltage and time
has been used, the cursor and reference lines may not at the bottom of the display (other special measurements can
be visible on the screen. To bring them back into view also be displayed as selected in the Measurements menu, see
use the cursor buttons as described below. Sections 3.12 and 3.13).
The voltage and time, near the bottom of the display, are
2.4.2 The Cursor and Reference Lines referenced from time=0 (trigger point) and voltage=0
Once activated using the Select Trace (Enter) button (9), (ground) by default. The horizontal reference line (voltage)
three lines appear on the trace as shown in Figure 2.4.2. Both or vertical reference line (time) can be used as alternate
the reference lines extend the full width or height of the references for making delta voltage and time measurements.
display and the cursor is a short line that can be moved along This can be achieved by changing the parameters of the
the trace from sample to sample. cursor measurement (see Section 3.13).
Time Reference Voltage Reference Cursor Note: Each channel’s ground position may be in a different
position on the screen.
Moving the Horizontal Reference The horizontal refer-
C 2V OFF OFF OFF 50µs ence moves vertically on the screen when either the up or
down Cursor buttons (3) are pressed and the Cursor/
Reference button (4) is in the Reference mode.
Locating the Zero Volts Reference Pressing both the
up and down Cursor buttons (3) simultaneously moves the
horizontal reference to the zero volts level on the screen.
The left/right Cursor buttons (3) are multifunctional.
Moving the Vertical Reference The vertical reference
moves across the screen when either the left or right Cursor
buttons (3) are pressed and the Cursor/Reference button
(4) is in the Reference mode.
Locating Zero Time Pressing both the left and right
Cursor buttons (3) simultaneously moves the vertical cur-
Figure 2.4.2a The Cursor and Reference Lines sor to the trigger time (t=0) origin on the screen. If in the
Delayed Sweep mode, simultaneously pressing the left and
Movement of these lines is achieved using a combination of right Cursor buttons (3) moves the vertical reference to the
the Cursor buttons (3) and the Cursor/Reference left edge of the screen.
button (4).
28
Selecting the Next Peak Pressing the up Cursor button 2.5.1 Internal Thermal plotter
(3) and either the left or right Cursor button (3) simulta-
The thermal plotter option is a fast, high quality plotter,
neously moves the cursor to the next peak.
which provides hard copies of displayed or stored data in the
Selecting the Next Valley Pressing the down Cursor form of single or repetitive screen dumps. It can also plot
button (3) and either the left or right Cursor button (3) menus. All plot parameters are user selectable through the
simultaneously moves the cursor to the next valley. instrument’s menu system (see Section 3.22).
Placement of the cursor and reference lines at the required Note: The head should be lifted whenever the plotter is not
positions is easier for you at those points where the slope of in use to prevent flat spots forming on the pressure
the waveform is at its steepest. For example, on a standard roller. 2
sine wave, the easiest points to place the measurement lines
Plots of persisted displays may take longer than normal due
to measure the wavelength are two 0 V crossing points or
to the number of traces that have to be plotted.
points of inflection. If a trace is zoomed, then the cursor can
be set more precisely and placed on the required sample.
2.5.2 Thermal Plotter Paper
2.5 Plot Action The thermal image is formed by a chemical reac-
tion between a dye precursor and acceptor coated on the
A plot of the screen display and annotation can be obtained paper and stimulated by the application of heat. As with any
at any time by pressing the Plot button (8). Menus can also chemical reaction, the operating conditions should be tightly
be plotted. The plot can be sent to the internal thermal plotter controlled for consistent results.
if installed, or it can be sent to an external HPGL plotter via
the centronic (parallel) RS423 or GPIB interface. Selection Only the recommended paper should be used
with the thermal plotter. The paper is matched to the print
When sending plots to an external plotter, µ is converted to head characteristics and has been selected for sensitivity,
the letter u and any other special characters such as Ω will be definition and nonabrasiveness. Variations in these qualities
converted to a question mark (?). affect print quality and head life. Low definition label grade
The plot destination and parameters are set via the menu papers are not suitable. A paper with different coating or
system (see Section 3.8.4). thickness could lead to abnormal head deterioration, poor
image definition and inaccurate print registration.
Dot Join The plotter will plot the dot joined image as it
appears on the screen. If dot join is not required it should be Any damage or wear caused by the use of inappropriate
turned off using the Dot join on/off feature in the Display papers will invalidate the warranty.
menu (see Section 3.5). Feed The paper is automatically advanced at the start and
Date and Time The original date and time of the trace finish of each plot. Further paper can be fed through the
acquisitions (including recalled traces) and the current date mechanism by pressing the manual feed button. This button
and time are plotted. is situated in a recess in the plotter assembly.
Note: Paper is fed while the button is pressed even if a plot
is in progress.
29
2.5.3 Loading Paper Storage For best results the thermal paper should
be stored to avoid direct sunlight, moisture and fingerprints.
1. Remove and discard the first complete layer of paper
The paper is desensitized by certain amines and esters.
from the roll, because it is sticky in order to hold the roll
together and the glue can block up the plotter mecha- Printed Image Archiving If the printed thermal image is
nism. With scissors, cut the end of the paper square. stored in an ordinary manila file folder in the absence of light
below 25 °C (77 °F) and with an average relative humidity
2. Open the plotter by pressing the cover catch and remov-
of 65%, it will remain legible for a minimum of five years,
ing the cover.
provided that there is no contact with adhesive, solvent or
3. Remove the shaft from the paper cradle and, if the plotter plasticizer bearing materials or vapors.
2 has been used previously, remove the plastic tube from
In general usage, degradation of the thermal image is caused
the shaft.
by exposure to sunlight, moisture, adhesive tape, PVC
4. Insert the shaft through the paper roll and fit the roll into folders, or fingerprints, but it is tolerant enough to survive in
the paper cradle so that the paper feeds from the under- a general “lab book” type environment below 54 °C (130 °F)
side of the roll as shown in Figure 2.5.1. with a relative humidity below 80%.
5. Pull the head lift lever forward (toward the side of the Plot Cancel A plot can be stopped by pressing the Cancel
instrument) and insert the end of the paper into the plotter button (5).
mechanism behind the pressure roller and push it through
Error Messages Under certain conditions, an error mes-
until the end of the paper reappears at the front.
sage relating to the thermal plotter is displayed on the
6. Pull enough paper through to pass through the top cover, oscilloscope’s screen. If a plot is in progress when an error
ensure that it is running around the plotter mechanism condition occurs, it will be aborted and any plots requested
smoothly and that it is straight, then lower the head by will be refused. The possible messages are:
pushing the head lift lever towards the rear of the plotter.
PLOTTER OUT OF PAPER
7. Close the plotter cover and ensure that it latches shut.
PLOTTER HEAD RAISED
PLOTTER HOT ALLOW TO COOL
PLOTTER OUT OF PAPER is displayed if there is no
paper in the plotter. Inserting more paper will remove this
error.
PLOTTER HEAD RAISED appears if the plotter printing
head lever is in the forward position with the head away from
the pressure roller. Moving the head to the plotting position
clears this condition.
Figure 2.5.1 Thermal Plotter Paper Loading
30
3.1 The Menus 3.1.2 Entering User Names or Numbers
Many of the advanced features of the instrument are ac- Many operations require a user specified name or number
cessed through the menu system. The menu structure is and these are entered using a combination of the Cursor
summarized in Figure 3.1. All the front panel controls buttons (3) and the Cursor/Reference button (4).
remain live when menus are displayed, allowing the control
status to be changed at any time using either the front panel 3.1.3 Menus
controls or the menu buttons.
There are three menu buttons and one other button which
The menus consist of rows of text each of which is in line each select a menu to replace the current display. The menu
with one of the buttons to the right of the display. On some buttons are: Main menu button (12), Measure menu
of the lines there are characters in inverse video, these show button (14), and Save/Recall menu button (13). The addi-
which option has been chosen. In some cases, when there are tional button is the Trace On/Off button (35). See Figure
a large number of options, only the selected one is shown. 3.1.
3
3.1.1 Definitions 3.1.4 The Main Operation Buttons

The Menu Selection buttons (1) to the right of the display The Main Operation buttons are used in conjunction with the
may have different labels or names but are essentially a “do menu system to provide a large number of extra functions
it” control which cause the selected action to happen. Some not otherwise available directly from the front panel. Press-
of these “do it” functions are as follows: ing these buttons when the menus are displayed operates the
Return: Returns to the previous menu with the selections menu functions described in Sections 3.2 to 3.13.
unchanged.
Clear: Clears the complete selection line. 3.1.5 Menu On/Off
Delete: Deletes the last character in an entry pad or deletes The Menu On/Off button (39) toggles the display between
the whole selected item. the traces and the last menu used.
Insert: Puts the highlighted character into the character
string on an entry panel.
1 2 12 13 14
↑ Moves the highlight up the list
↓ Moves the highlight down the list Cancel
Index
Menus
Auto
Setup Save
Indicates approximately how far through a list the Save Plot Main Recall Measure
highlighted item is.

CURSORS TRIGGER
Select Trace
Arm Level
(Enter) Sens
Trgd
Line Ext
Cursor CH3 CH4 DC AC Norm
Ref CH1 CH2 LF HF Auto
1 2 3
Main
Trace
On/Off
Menu V/DIV V/DIV V/DIV

DC DC
Gnd Gnd Live Ref
On/Off Ref AC Ref AC Ref
39 35
Figure 3.1 The Menu Operation Buttons
31
3.2 Main Menu 3.3.1 50 Ω Select Menu (Integra 60 Only)

The Main Menu allows you to set up your Integra to acquire The input impedance of each of the input channels can be
and analyze data. To access the Main menu, press the Main
60 independently set to either 1 MΩ or 50 Ω using this menu.
menu button (12). You can set different parameters for your
Integra by selecting any of the menus available in the Main 50 Ω SELECT
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Return
. . . 1
menu.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
MAIN MENU
. . . . . . . . . . . . . Acquisition
. . . . Menu
. . . 1
. . . .1 MΩ
CH1: . . .50. Ω. . . . . . . . . . . . 3
. . . . . . . . . . . Sweep
. . . Length
. . . Menu
. . . 2
. . . .1 MΩ
CH2: . . .50. Ω. . . . . . . . . . . . 4
3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trigger
. . . Menu
. . . 3
. . . .1 MΩ
CH3: . . .50. Ω. . . . . . . . . . . . 5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . Timebase
. . . . Menu
. . . 4
. . . .1 MΩ
CH4: . . .50. Ω. . . . . . . . . . . . 6
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display
. . . Menu
. . . 5
. . . .50. Ω. .5 V
. . R.M.S.
. . . .Max
. . . . . . . 7
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Utility
. . Menu
. . . 6
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
. . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequence
. . . . Menu
. . . 7
Figure 3.3.1 50 Ω Select Menu Example
. . . . . . . . . . . Trace
. . . Analysis
. . . Menu
. . . 8
Menu On/Off to Exit The numeric button alongside the required channel number
on the display toggles the impedance between 50 Ω and 1
Figure 3.2 Main Menu
MΩ. When changing from 1 MΩ to 50 Ω a second press of
the button is required to confirm the action.
3.3 Acquisition Menu While a channel’s impedance is set to 50 Ω the relevant front
panel indicator is illuminated.
The Acquisition menu contains a mixture of submenus and
control selections. This menu is obtained from the Main
CAUTION: The maximum input voltage to the
Menu button (12). To obtain the submenu or change selec-
instrument in 50 Ω mode is 5 V RMS.
tions, press the relevant button. Voltages in excess of this may damage the
instrument and make it unsafe.
ACQUISITION MENU
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
50. Ω. Select
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
3.3.2 Bandwidth & Calibration Menu (Integra 60
Only)
. . . . &. Calibration
Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
BANDWIDTH & CALIBRATION
60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Return
. . . 1
. . . Scaling
Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
. . . Offsets
Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
. . Detect:
Glitch . . . .OFF
. . ON
. . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Bandwidth
. . . . (Bw):
. . .FULL
. . 100MHz
. . . . 20MHz
. . . 1MHz
. . . . 3
. . . . (Off)
Averaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Monthly
. . . Calibration
. . . . .Prompt:
. . . OFF
. . ON
. . . . . . . 4
. . . . .(Off)
Persistence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Force
. . Calibration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Figure 3.3 The Acquisition Menu
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Figure 3.3.2 Bandwidth & Calibration Menu Example
32
Bandwidth The bandwidth of all input channels can be When the required item is highlighted, press button [7] to
limited to 100 MHz, 20 MHz, or 1 MHz using button [2]. change the scaling factors.
This can be useful when the signals of interest have high
If one of the traces is selected, the menu changes to the
frequency noise superimposed on them. When bandwidth
Scaled Volts Measurements menu and if Time is selected the
limit has been turned on, the Bw symbol will appear at the
menu changes to the Scaled Time Measurements menu.
upper left hand side of the trace display.
Monthly Calibration Prompt If this option is turned on, VERTICAL SCALING
once a month a prompt appears on the display to remind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Return
. . . 1
users that, if necessary, they can force a calibration by
. . . =. SCALE
Reading . . . x .(Volts-ZERO
. . . . .OFFSET)
. . . . . . . 2
pressing button [4] on this menu.
Force Calibration Button [4] causes the instrument to . .= +1.00E+00
CH1 . . . . .x (Volts
. . . - +0.00E+00)
. . . . . . . . . . 3
perform a re-calibration of all channels and ranges. To
. . VOLT
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
3
obtain the best results from this function, the instrument Units:
should gave been operating for at least 15 minutes.
. . Factor:
Scale . . . +1.00E+00
. . . . .VOLT/Volt
. . . . . . . . . . 5
Force re-calibration is always available regardless of the
instrument’s acquisition status. Forcing a calibration will . .Offset:
Zero . . .+0.00E+00
. . . . Volts
. . . . . . . . . . . 6
stop any acquisition that is in progress and will not store any
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
data already acquired.
When a forced calibration is complete, the display will . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
return to the normal trace display.
Figure 3.3.3b A Vertical Scaling Menu Example
3.3.3 Channel Scaling Menu From this menu the trace to be scaled, the units, scale factor
The measurement traces and their current scalings are dis- and zero offset can all be set or changed. To enter data for any
played. Select the one to be scaled using buttons [2] and [3]. of the items, press the appropriate button: [4], [5] or [6].
The current scaling type of the selected trace is shown. To select a trace, press button [3]. Each press of the button
The scaling of the highlighted trace or time can be turned on steps to the next trace name or time and the currently set scale
and off using button [6]. To turn off all scaling, press button factors are displayed.
[8] to change the Measurement Scaling parameter from If Units is pressed, the display changes to the Scale Annota-
Enabled to Disabled. tion Entry Pad from which four characters can be entered.
CHANNEL SCALING If either Scale Factor or Zero Offset is pressed, the display
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Return
. . . 1 changes to a numeric entry pad from which a nine digit
number can be entered.
. . . =. Scale
Reading . . x. (Volts-ZERO
. . . . . OFFSET)
. . . . . . . . 2
When all the entries are as required, press button [1] to
. . .Scale
. . . . Offset
. . . . . . Units
. . . . . . . 3 return.
CH1 : +1.00+00 +0.00E+00 VOLT OFF
CH2
. .: +1.00+00
. . . . . +0.00E+00
. . . . . .VOLT
. . OFF
. . . . . 4
CH3 : +1.00+00 +0.00E+00 VOLT OFF
CH4 : +1.00+00 +0.00E+00 VOLT OFF
. .:
TIME . . . . . . . . . .
+1.00+00 . . . . . . . . 5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Off/On
. . . 6
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Change
. . . 7
. . . DISABLED
Scaling: . . . . . ENABLED
. . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Figure 3.3.3a Channel Scaling Menu Example
33
HORIZONTAL SCALING HORIZONTAL SCALING

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Return
. . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Return
. . . 1
Reading
. . . =. SCALE
. . . FACTOR
. . . . x. Seconds
. . . . . . . . 2 Reading
. . . =. SCALE
. . . FACTOR
. . . . x. Seconds
. . . . . . . . 2
. . . - +0.00E+00
HORIZ . . . . . SECS/Second
. . . . . . . . . . . . 3 HORIZ
. . . - +0.00E+00
. . . . . SECS/Second
. . . . . . . . . . . . 3
. . SECS
Units: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Units:
. . SECS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
. . Factor:
Scale . . . +1.00E+00
. . . . . SECS/Second
. . . . . . . . . . 5 Ref
. to
. Cursor:
. . . .+1.00E+00
. . . . SECS
. . . . . . . . . . 5
. . Mode:
Entry . . . DIRECT
. . . .REF
. .TO. CURSOR
. . . . . . . . 6 Entry
. . Mode:
. . . DIRECT
. . . .REF
. .TO. CURSOR
. . . . . . . . 6
3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Figure 3.3.3c Horizontal Scaling Menu Example Figure 3.3.3d Horizontal Scaling Menu Example
The Horizontal Scaling menu has two forms depending If an attempt is made to set the horizontal scaling in Refer-
upon the entry mode selected in line [6]. If the entry mode is ence to Cursor mode when the cursor and the vertical
Direct, the menu is as shown in Figure 3.3.1c, but if the entry reference are at the same position on the screen, the message
mode is Reference to Cursor, then the menu is as shown in CURSOR AND REFERENCE SAME will be displayed and
Figure 3.3.1d. the scaling will not be set. Similarly, if the cursor is off the
To change from one mode to the other, press button [6]. message CURSORS OFF will be displayed and again the
scaling will not be set.
From this menu the units and scale factor or reference to
cursor time can be set or changed. To enter data for any of the When the instrument is in XY mode the horizontal scaling
items, press the appropriate button: [4] or [5]. cannot be set. An attempt to do so will result in the message
CANNOT SET SCALING IN XY being displayed.
To select a trace instead of Time, press button [3]. Each press
of the button steps to the next trace name from CH1 through
CH4 and back to Time and the currently set scale factors are
displayed.
If Units is pressed, the display changes to the Scale Annota-
tion Entry Pad from which four characters can be entered.
If either Scale Factor or Reference to Cursor is pressed, the
display changes to a numeric entry pad from which a nine
digit number can be entered.
When all the entries are as required, press button [1] to
return.
34
3.3.4 Scaling In Reference to Cursor mode, the positions of the time

The scaling menus enable you to scale cursor measurement reference and time cursor are used.
results into user defined units. number entered
Scale Factor =
Scaling is applied to the cursor measurement trace in both Time (in secs) between reference and cursor
horizontal and vertical axes as required to produce scaled This can be useful if, for instance, a pulse is known to
volts and scaled time measurements. The measurement on represent a certain amount, this can be entered and then
screen can have a four digit user defined annotation to measurements taken from the rest of the trace that relate to
indicate scaling units. These units also replace the ordinary the known amount.
V/div readings and carry through all subsequent analysis
automatically without the user having to scale and define the Note that scaling affects all subsequent analysis and not just
units for each analysis. the original cursor measurement.
Scaling factors are only applied to the following measure- 3

ments. 3.3.5 Channel Offsets Menu (Integra 60 Only)
The offset facility enables a DC pedistal on a signal to be
60 cancelled out so that a more sensitive V/DIV range can be
i. Volts and time used to examine the actual signal in greater detail.
ii. Volts and 1/time
iii. Top and base
CHANNEL OFFSETS
iv. Amplitude (top – base) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Return
. . . 1
v. Peak to peak
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
vi. Max and min CH1 2.0400V
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
vii. Rise and fall time
viii. Pulse width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
CH3 0.0000V
ix. Period (from frequency, period and duty cycle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
x. RMS and ACRMS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
xi. X and Y CH3 0.0000V
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
xii. t
Scaled volts measurements consist of a scaling (multiply- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
ing) factor and an offset. Therefore, a scaling factor of 1 with CH4 0.0000V
an offset of 0 means that, in effect, no scaling has been 9
applied. The scaling factor and the offset can vary between
±1E±30.
Scaling is calculated in the following way: the offset is Figure 3.3.5 Channel Offsets Menu Example
subtracted from the original value then the result is multi- The effect of the offset voltage is to add a calibrated shift to
plied by the scaling factor. The offset is therefore, in reality, the actual signal so that, for example, for a signal which has
an offset from 0 or ground. Therefore the scaled measure- a +20 V DC component, applying a +20 V offset will cause
ment = the +20 V signal level to be displayed where 0 V was
(unscaled measurement–offset) × Scalefactor originally displayed.
Scaled time measurements, however, are calculated in one The relevant ↑ and ↓ keys increase and decrease the applied
of two ways, Direct or Reference to Cursor. channel offset voltages. Note that the traces move relative to
the screen in the opposite direction to the arrows. The rate of
In Direct mode, the specified scale factor is applied directly change of the offset voltage increases if the button is held
to the timebase setting to produce a result. down for longer than 1 second and there is a short pause in
the change as the voltage passes through zero.
35
The offset voltage range varies with the vertical V/div 3.3.6 Glitch Detect
setting as shown in the table below:
This entry does not select a further menu, it directly controls
V/Div Maximum Offset 20 the glitch detect or Max/Min function. Each press of button
[4] alternately turns Glitch Detect on and off.
2 mV - 50 mV ±500 mV
Glitches are detected by a glitch detect capture system which
100 mV - 500 mV ±5 V
is designed to detect narrow glitches that may occur between
1V-5V ±50 V timebase sample points. It operates on the signal as it is
captured and can detect narrow pulses down to 10 ns wide.
The offset voltage step size also varies with the V/Div
Any glitches detected will at least be displayed as a spike.
setting.
They will be detected whether they are positive (max) or
If the V/DIV sensitivity is changed so that the offset voltage negative (min).
3 set is larger than permitted, the offset voltage will be set to
Glitch Detect is useful for detecting aliases because, if there
the maximum allowed for the V/DIV setting and its value
are many maximum and minimum points in a capture, these
shown in reverse video.
levels are stored, thus building up an envelope of the true
When a probe other than permitted, the offset voltage will be waveform. If the signal peak–to–peak amplitude is constant
set to the maximum allowed for the V/DIV setting and its then the envelope will appear as two horizontal lines of data
value shown in reverse video. points with, if dot join is on, the band between these lines
When a probe other than a x1 is selected in the Probe Gain filled in.
Select Menu, the displayed V/DIV and offset voltage will be Each pair of dots on the display represents the maximum and
scaled accordingly. minimum levels of all the samples during that two dot
The offset facility is available only when the channel cou- display period. For example, in 50 k mode there will be 200
pling is set to DC. samples represented by each pair of display points.
Offset is temporarily cancelled if the input coupling is

switched AC and the message No Offset with AC coupling
briefly appears at the bottom of the screen. The instrument
saves the offset value and when the channel coupling is
returned to DC or ground, the offset voltage is once again
applied.
Applying an offset may cause the oscilloscope to lose trigger
because it applies an offset to the signal and not to the trigger
level.
If a large offset is applied, the trace may be off the screen and
if the offset is sufficiently large, the vertical position control
may not have enough range to bring the trace back into view.
36
3.3.7 Averaging Menu 3.3.8 Persistence Menu

It is possible to improve the signal to noise ratio of repetitive This menu is used for setting the Persistence mode param-
input signals by averaging them. Averaging is switched On eters. To turn Persistence mode On or Off use button [2]. See
or Off by pressing button [2]. Section 2.3.4.
AVERAGING PERSISTENCE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Return
. . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Return
. . . 1
. . . . . .OFF
Averaging(Av): . . ON
. . . . . . . . . . . . 2 . . . . . OFF
Persistence: . . ON
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Averaging Value: (Cursor < >)
2. .4 . 8 . 16. .32. 64
. . 128
. . 256
. . 512
. . 1024
. . . . . 3 . . . . Mode:
Persistence . . . TIME
. . .SWEEPS
. . . . . . . . . . 3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 . . (Seconds):
. . . . 0.5
. . 2. 5. .15. 30
. . 90. .∞ . . . . 4
Time 3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . 10
Sweeps: . . 20
. .50. 100
. . .200. .500
. .∞ . . . . . 5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . MONOCHROME
Style: . . . . . . . COLOR
. . . . . . . . . . . 6
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Figure 3.3.4 Averaging Menu Figure 3.3.5 Persistence Menu

When averaging is turned on, the Av symbol appears at the Persistence Either the number of acquisitions accumu-
top of the trace display. lated before the display is cleared or the absolute time
between display clearances can be set from this menu.
Averaging works on input signals in two different ways
depending upon whether the instrument is in Live or Hold The choice of Persistence for time or number of acquisitions
Next mode. is made using button [3] with the actual time or number of
sweeps set by button [4] or [5] as appropriate.
If the instrument is in Live mode, this function converts the
display into a weighted average of previous acquisitions. Persistence Time Button [4] sets the time in seconds
Button [3] selects the averaging factor used in the algorithm:– between screen clears when Persistence mode is turned on.
When this selection is set to ∞, the screen is never automati-
an (f–1) + d n cally cleared, although the user can always press the Live
An = button (19) or the Hold Next button (20), which forces a
f
Where: n = The data point (1 to 50000) display clear, so the resulting display will be a composite
An = New value at n picture of all the acquisitions performed from the point at
an = Old value at n which Persistence mode was selected.
f = Averaging factor (2 to 1024) Persistence Sweeps Button [5] sets the number of
dn = Latest value at n acquisitions between screen clears when Persistence mode
In Live mode, if 8 acquisitions are selected, the instrument is selected. When this selection is set to ∞, the screen is never
adds 1/8 of each new acquisition to 7/8 of the existing trace. automatically cleared, although the user can always press
This means that any single acquisition that deviates from an the Live button (19) or the Hold Next button (20), which
otherwise consistent level contributes 1/8 of its deviation to forces a display clear, so the resulting display will be a
the display. composite picture of all the acquisitions performed from the
point at which Persistence mode was selected.
Averaging over 512 or 1024 acquisitions is not available
with a memory length of 10 k or over. Persistence Style The style of the persistence display can
be either Monochrome or Color (Integra 20 only). The
If the instrument is in Hold Next mode, only the number of
selection is made using button [6]. When set to Mono-
acquisitions selected by button [3] contribute to the result-
chrome, all traces are persisted in the same color as set in the
ant, unweighted, i.e. true averaging where each display point
Display color menu. The most recent acquisition is still
is the average level of that point for the specified number of
displayed in the trace’s own color.
acquisitions.
When set to Color (Integra 20 only), each trace is persisted
in its own color.
37
3.4 Sweep Length Menu MultiShot When multishot is turned on, the display is split
into a series of separate acquisitions or segments which are
The selection of the sweep length for acquisitions is con- displayed as continuous traces.
trolled by the Sweep Length menu. This menu is obtained
from the Main Menu button. SWEEP LENGTH MENU
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select
. . . 1
SWEEP LENGTH MENU
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select
. . . 1 . . . Selection:
Current . . . . 2 .x 5000
. . . . . . . . . . . . 2
20 x 500
. . . Selection:
Current . . . . 50000
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 10. x .1000
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
20000 100 x 500
50000
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 50. x .1000
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
200000 10 x 5000
500000
3 . . . . . . . . . .
1000000 . . . . . . . . . . 4 . . . . OFF
Multishot: . . ON
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2000000
. . . . OFF
Multishot: . . ON
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
DSO
. . . .Timebase:
Maximum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10µs
. . S/Shot
. . . 7
Recorder
DSO
20ms
. . (1
. channel)
. . . . . . . . . . . .5ms
. .S/Shot
. . . 7 . . .Time:
Sweep . . 2s
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
50ms (2 channel)
100ms (4 channels)
. . .Time:
Sweep . . 2s
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Figure 3.4b Sweep Length Menu – Multishot
Figure 3.4a Sweep Length Menu The length and number of segments that the display can be
split into vary according to the sweep length available.
To change the sweep length, first select the Sweep Length
required using buttons [2] and [3], then press button [1], Each segment of the display becomes a separate acquisition
Select. A second press of the button is required and is which is started by a trigger in the normal way.
prompted for by the message PRESS AGAIN TO CON- Multishot becomes useful if there are a number of events that
FIRM. need to be captured with an appreciable time between
events. Instead of setting the instrument to a very slow
WARNING: Changing the sweep length impacts on timebase, the timebase can be kept fast so that the horizontal
several areas of the instrument’s operation. resolution can be maintained. Each time a trigger is received,
This feature should be used with care.
the next segment will be acquired.
The maximum timebase, the number of memories and the Cursor measurements made across segments show the ac-
maximum zoom factor all vary depending on the sweep tual time between events and not the apparent time accord-
length selected as shown in the menu. ing to the number of screen divisions between events.
Note: When the sweep length is changed, the instrument
attempts to keep the same timebase (time per division)
and zoom parameters, if they are permissible, for the
chosen new sweep length. This means the sample rate
(time per point) changes to maintain the same
timebase (time per division). If a particular zoom
factor or timebase is not possible, the nearest
allowable value will be set.
For example, if the instrument is set to a zoom factor
of ×200 with a memory length of 10 k, changing the
sweep length to 0.5 k will result in the zoom factor
being set to ×10.
The Maximum Timebase (time per division) values for
20 both the Recorder mode (Roll) and DSO mode (Refresh) are
displayed for the currently highlighted sweeplength selec-
tion. The sweep time for the recorder mode is also displayed.
38
3.5 Trigger Menu Numerical Entry Certain functions on the Trigger menus
require numbers to be entered. This can be done in two ways:
When the Trigger menu is selected, the display changes to the appropriate front panel control, e.g. the Trigger Position
show the current trigger setup. rocker switch (17), can be used to set the Pretrigger View
and the Cursor buttons (3) can be used to enter the required
EDGE TRIGGER
numbers.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Change
. . . 1
To enter a number, select the field to be changed by pressing
. . . . . B .TRIGGER
A TRIGGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 the appropriate key then:
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1. The digits are entered one at a time, starting with the most
significant digit –the left hand one– using the up and
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 down cursor buttons.
2 The digit currently being entered is shown in inverse 3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
A (CH1) video.
Source View
. 0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 3. After a digit has been entered, the next one to the right is
highlighted by pressing the right cursor button.
. . . .View
Pretrigger . . . Trigger
. .0.0% . . . . . . . . . . . 7
0
4. If it is required to skip a digit or go back to a previous
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 digit, the cursor left and right buttons can be used to
move the entry point along the number and to leave the
Figure 3.5a Trigger Menu field to complete the entry.
To change the setup, press the button labeled Change. This To terminate numeric entry and deselect the feature at any
will display the Trigger mode menu, from which a different time during input, press the Cancel button (5). The previous
Trigger mode can be selected using buttons [2] and [3]. value is retained.
Trigger Position Rocker Switch To enable a pretrigger
TRIGGER MODE percentage or a delay time, press the Trigger Position
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select
. . . 1
rocker switch (17) to set the required time or percentage.
. . . . BY
. .N GATES
. . . .B . . . . . . . . . . 2 Press the left side of the rocker switch to set the appropriate
A DELAYED
A DELAYED BY TIME GATES B delay time. Press the right side of the rocker switch to set the
B GATES A DELAYED BY N appropriate pretrigger percentage. Press the middle of the
. . . . . . . . . . . .
BAND . . . . . . . . 3
COMBINATION rocker switch to set the trigger position to t=0 (no or zero
DELAY
. . BY
. .N . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cancel
. . . 4 delay time and pretrigger percentage).
DIVIDE BY N
DUAL SLOPE When entering a delay, the resolution of the delay steps is
. . . . . . . . . . . .
EDGE . . . . . . . . 5
FREQUENCY/PERIOD dependent on the timebase selected. Faster timebases have
MISSING EVENT smaller delay steps. The steps are 2% of the timebase range
. . WIDTH
PULSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
SKEW or 2 ns whichever is greater, i.e. at 250 ns/div the delay steps
TV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 are 2 ns while at 1 s/div the delay steps are 20 ms.
. . . .View
Pretrigger . .0.0%
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Trigger indication On the Trigger menus there are “soft
LEDs” which provide an indication of the trigger states for
various sources. These become increasing more useful as the
Figure 3.5b Trigger Mode Menu
trigger setups become more complex. When a trigger signal
is present they are shown as solid circles, otherwise they are
shown as hollow circles.
Slope To change the slope or edge to which the trigger
systems will respond, press the +/– Slope button (27). This
also changes the diagrammatic representation on the trigger
menus so that the trigger setup can be readily seen.
39
Source To change the trigger source press the Trigger 3.5.1 Trigger Modes
Source button (21). The trigger menu in use changes to
reflect the change of source. TRIGGER MODE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select
. . . 1
A/B Trigger To change the trigger setup from the A to the
20 B trigger (or B to A) press the A/B Trigger button (26). The . . . . BY
A DELAYED . .N GATES
. . . .B . . . . . . . . . . 2
trigger menu in use will change to reflect the different state A DELAYED BY TIME GATES B
B GATES A DELAYED BY N
40 of the two systems. . . . . . . . . . . . .
BAND . . . . . . . . 3
COMBINATION
DELAY
. . BY
. .N . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cancel
. . . 4
60 DIVIDE BY N
DUAL SLOPE
. . . . . . . . . . . .
EDGE . . . . . . . . 5
Pretrigger/Trigger Delay The menu shows, for either the A FREQUENCY/PERIOD
MISSING EVENT
3 or B trigger, the amount of trigger delay time set for the . . WIDTH
PULSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
sweep or the pretrigger percentage. SKEW
TV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Post trigger delay is shown in 2 µs increments as a combina-
tion number with ‘.’, ‘m’, ‘µ’ and ‘ns’ as the separators. A . . . .View
Pretrigger . .0.0%
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
number such as 012.452m372µ747n5s means
12.4523727475 seconds or 12 seconds, 452 ms, 372 µs and Figure 3.5.1 Trigger Tools Menu
747.5 ns.
The Trigger menu is selected by selecting Trigger menu
Pretrigger percentage can be set from 0.0% to 100.0%.
from the Main menu. The current Trigger mode and Con-
figuration menu is displayed. An example is shown in Figure
3.5.1.1.
To change the trigger type, press button [1] and the display
changes to the Trigger Mode menu as shown in Figure 3.5.1.
The Integra 10 and Integra 15 have only Edge and Dual
10 Slope trigger mode selections.
15
The Integra 20 and Integra 40 have the trigger mode selec-

20 tions shown in Figure 3.5.1 except for Band and TV.
40
The Integra 60 has the trigger mode selections shown for

60 Figure 3.5.1 except for Dual Slope. The Band Trigger mode
is similar to the Dual Slope mode.
To select the required trigger mode, use buttons [2] and [3]
to scroll through the displayed list. When the required type
is highlighted, press button [1] to select. The following
sections describe the various trigger modes.
40
3.5.1.1 Edge Trigger 3.5.1.3 Band Trigger (Integra 60 Only)

The Edge trigger can be used to trigger on an edge, either Band trigger produces a trigger when the selected input
10 positive or negative, with pre or post trigger, if required. The 60 signal either enters or leaves a band, which is defined by the
menu display changes to show the selection. two trigger levels.
15
EDGE TRIGGER BAND TRIGGER
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Change
. . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Change
. . . 1
20 Trigger when signal
. . . . . B .TRIGGER
A TRIGGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
40
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . BAND
ENTERS . . . LEAVES
. . . .BAND
. . . . . . . . . . 3
60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
A (CH1) Level A 0
Source View
. 0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . or
A (CH1) . . . . . . . . 6
Level B 0
. . . .View
Pretrigger . . . Trigger
. .0.0% . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
0 Trigger
0
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Figure 3.5.1.1 Edge Trigger Menu Figure 5.5.1.2 Band Trigger Menu
Press button [8] to use the cursor buttons for changing the Band trigger can only be used with CH1 as the trigger source.
value. Otherwise, use the Trigger Position rocker switch
To set the A and B trigger levels, select the appropriate one
(17) to increase or decrease the Pretrigger View value.
using the A/B Trigger button (26) and adjust using the
The trigger point can be on the rising or falling edge by Level/Sens button (16).
changing the setting of the +/– Slope button (27).
Enters Band Leaves Band To change from triggering
when the signal enters the band to whenb the signal leaves
3.5.1.2 Dual Slope Trigger the band, press button [3] or the +/– Slope button (27).
The Dual Slope trigger can be used to trigger on both Level To set the A and B levels, select A and B as
10 positive or negative. The instrument acquires data when the appropriate using the A/B Trigger button (26) and the
signal leaves the sensitivity band in either direction. Level/Sens button (16).
15 The A level will always be above the B level. If the A level
DUAL SLOPE TRIGGER
is reduced too far it will also force the B level down.
20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Change . . . 1
Similarly, if the B level is increased to far it will force the A
Acquire when the signal leaves the
. . . .band
. .in .either
. . direction.
. . . . . . . . . . . 2 level up. The minimum separation is approximately 0.5 div.
sensitivity
40
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
. . . .Trigger
. . .Trigger
. . . Trigger
. . . . . . . . . . 8
Figure 3.5.1.2 Dual Slope Trigger Menu
41
3.5.1.4 Pulse Width Trigger 3.5.1.5 Frequency/Period Trigger

The Pulse Width trigger can be used to trigger when the A trigger can be produced by a frequency or a period being
20 width of a pulse is either narrower or wider than a predefined 20 less than or greater than a predefined value. The frequency
time. The menu display changes to show the selection. is specified in Hz and the period in seconds.
40 40
PULSE WIDTH TRIGGER FREQUENCY/PERIOD TRIGGER
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Change
. . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Change
. . . 1
60 60 Acquire when the trigger
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 . . . . LESS
Frequency: . . . THAN
. . .GREATER
. . . . THAN
. . . . . . 2
Acquire when the trigger pulse width is: Period: ≤LESS THAN GREATER THAN
. . THAN
LESS . . . GREATER
. . . . THAN. . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . 000.000m000µ007n5s
Period: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 . . . . 133.333
. . . .MHz
. . . . . . . . . . . . 4
3 000.000m000µ005n0s Frequency:
A. (CH1)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . between:
Measure . . . . RISING
. . . .FALLING
. . . .edges
. . . . . 5
Time
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 B. (CH3)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Start Timeout
Timer Trigger Source Frequency/Period
. . . . . . 0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . 0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Trigger
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Figure 3.5.1.3 Pulse Width Trigger Menu Figure 3.5.1.4 Frequency/Period Trigger Menu
To set the time, press button [4] and use the Cursor buttons Less Than Greater Than To change from triggering
(3). when the frequency or period is less than the specified
number to triggering when the frequency or period is greater
The trigger point is always on the back edge of the pulse,
than the specified number, press button [2].
regardless of the pulse polarity or whether the pulse width
trigger is set to Greater Than or Less Than. To produce a To set the frequency or period, press button [3] or [4] and use
trigger after a particular time has elapsed, use Missing Event the Cursor buttons (3).
Trigger. See section 3.5.1.6.
Measure Between The edges which the trigger system
The +/– Slope button (27) should be used to change the will use can be either the rising or falling edges of the
polarity of the pulse to which the system will respond. waveform as set using button [4] or the +/– Slope button
(27).
Less Than/Greater Than To change from triggering
when the pulse width is less than the preset time to triggering
when the pulse width is greater than the preset time, press
button [3] until Greater Than is highlighted.
42
3.5.1.6 Skew Trigger 3.5.1.7 Missing Event Trigger

The Skew trigger responds to the difference in time between The Missing Event trigger looks for two events occurring
20 two trigger events. The two events, the A and B, can be on 20 within a preset time. If the second event does not occur, a
the same or different input signals. trigger is generated.
40 40
SKEW TRIGGER MISSING EVENT TRIGGER
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Change
. . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Change
. . . 1
60 60 Acquire if timeout occurs.
Acquire
. . . when
. . the
. .skew
. .between
. . . . . . . . . . . 2 . .timer
Start . . on:. .TriggerA
. . . (CH1)
. . . . . . . . . . . 2
trigger A and trigger B is: Reset timer on: Trigger B (CH2)
. . THAN
LESS . . . GREATER
. . . . THAN
. . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
000.000m000µ005n0s 000.114m000µ000n0s 3
. . . . A
. (CH1)
. . . . B. (CH4)
. . . . . . . . . . 5 . . .A (CH1)
. . . . B. (CH2)
. . . . A. (CH1)
. . . Timeout
. . . . 5
. . . . . . . . . Time
. . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . .Time
. . . . . . . . Time
. . . . . . 6
Start Trigger Timeout
. . . . . Timer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . Start
. . . . .Reset
. . . . Start
. . . . . . . . 7
Trigger
0 0
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Figure 3.5.1.5 Skew Trigger Menu Figure 3.5.1.6 Missing Event Trigger Menu
Less Than Greater Than To change from triggering The two events, A and B, can be on the same or different
when the time difference is less than the specified time to input signals.
triggering when the time difference is greater than the
To set the time difference, press button [4] and use the
specified time, press button [3].
Cursor buttons (3) .
To set the time difference, press button [4] and use the
To set the sources and the slopes for the A and B triggers, use
Cursor buttons (3).
the AB Trigger button (26) to select the appropriate system
To set the A and B sources, slopes and levels, select either A and the Trigger Source button (21) and the +/– Slope
or B as appropriate using the AB Trigger button (26) and button (27).
use the Trigger Source button (21) or +/– Slope button
(27) or the Trigger Level knob (15) and Level/Sens button
(16).
43
3.5.1.8 Combination Trigger Trig The state which will cause a trigger is set using button
[4]. There are five possible selections: Any Hi, Any Lo, All
The Combination trigger is used to produce a trigger when
20 a particular combination of events occur. The top line of this Hi, All Lo and Any Change.
menu provides a brief description of the trigger setup. Any Hi produces a trigger each time any one of the active
40 signals goes above its trigger level. If a signal goes above its
COMBINATION TRIGGER level when one of the other active signals is already above its
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Change
. . . 1 own level, then a trigger will not occur.
60 Acquire if all go Lo when clocked.
. . . .CH1
Channel: . .CH2
. . CH3 . . CH4
. . EXT
. . . . . . . . 2 Any Lo produces a trigger each time any one of the active
Level: -0.48 DIVs signals goes below its trigger level. If a signal goes below its
. . . ON
Source: . . ON. .OFF . .ON. .Ck/. . . . . . . . . 3 level when one of the other active signals is already below
Status: Hi Lo Lo Lo its own level, then a trigger will not occur.
. . Any
. .Hi/Lo
. . All. Hi/Lo
. . ANY
. . CHANGE
. . . . . . . . . 4
3 Trig:
Qualification All Hi produces a trigger each time all of the active signals
. . .GREATER/LESS
NONE . . . . . . .CLOCKED . . . . ENABLE
. . . . . . 5 end up above their own trigger levels.
TIME PERIOD
All Lo produces a trigger each time all of the active signals
. . Source:
Clock . . . CH3. . .EXT . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Channel X end up below their own trigger levels.
Channel
. . . Y. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Any Change produces a trigger each time any of the active
Clock Rise (/)
signals crosses its own trigger level. A trigger is produced
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
regardless of the direction of crossing and regardless of the
state of the other active signals.
Qualification The trigger conditions listed above can all be
Note: This part of the display shows a representation of qualified by a further condition so that a trigger will only
waveforms and trigger conditions, and changes as the occur if the trigger conditions and the qualification are both
combination parameters are changed. met.
Figure 3.5.1.7 Combination Trigger Menu The qualification is chosen using button [5] to scroll around
The selected occurrence can be enabled or clocked by one of the displayed list.
the trigger sources or qualified by a time period. The qualifications available are: Greater Than a Time Pe-
Channel To select a particular input signal, press button [2] riod, Less Than a Time Period, Clocked, and Enabled.
until the required input is highlighted and toggle it on and off Only Enabled is available for the Any Change trigger
using button [3]. condition.
Level This line shows the trigger level that has been set for Greater To produce a trigger with this qualification, the
the input signal highlighted in line 2. Use the Trigger Level trigger conditions have to be met and maintained for at least
knob (15) to change this setting. the time set as the time period. At the end of the time period,
Source This line shows which of the input signals are to be a trigger is produced. If the trigger conditions are not
used to provide the combination of signals. To stop using a maintained for the entire time period, the timer is reset and
signal, use button [3] to toggle the selected channel on and a trigger is not produced. The timer is restarted the next time
off. For a channel that is selected as the clock or enable the trigger conditions are met.
signal, button [3] changes the slope. The menu representa- Less To produce a trigger with this qualification, the trigger
tion of the slope also changes. conditions have to be met and maintained for less than the
Status This line shows the current status of the signals for time set as the time period. A trigger is produced when the
the input channels in use. The status is shown as Hi, Lo or as trigger conditions are no longer true, as long as this situation
a double pulse symbol, which indicates the state of the signal occurs before the end of the time period, e.g. if All Hi is
relative to the trigger level for that particular signal. The selected, a trigger will occur when any one of the signals
double pulse symbol shows that the signal is continuously goes Lo before the time period has expired.
crossing and recrossing the trigger level.
44
Clocked produces a trigger in sync with each positive or 3.5.1.9 A Delayed by Time Gates B Trigger
negative edge of the clock signal (as set by the +/– Slope
The A delayed by Time gates B trigger produces a trigger on
button (27)), if the trigger conditions are met, for example, 20 the first B trigger that occurs after a preset time following an
if All Lo is set and all the signals are Lo on the positive edge
initial A trigger.
of the clock signal, then a trigger will occur. If the signals are
still all Lo on the next clock edge, then another trigger will 40
A DELAYED BY TIME GATES B TRIGGER
not occur. In order for another trigger to occur, the original . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Change . . . 1
triggering condition must first go away for at least one clock 60 Trigger A + time delay enables
edge. acquisition
. . . . from . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
. . a .B trigger.
Enabled produces a trigger each time the trigger conditions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
000.112m800µ000ns
are met during the enable period. If the enable signal is not
valid when the trigger conditions are met, then a trigger will
not occur, similarly if the enable signal becomes valid while
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
A (CH1) 3
the trigger conditions have already been met, a trigger will Gate Source
. . . . . . . . .Delay
. . . . . . . . . . . 5
not occur. 0
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
To change the polarity of the enable signal, select the enable B (CH2)
signal with button [2] and either press the +/– Slope button Source Gate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
(27) or button [3]. 0
Trigger
Clock/Enable Source When using a clocked or enabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
qualification, the source of the clock or enable signal can be
set to any of the input channels which are not already on and Figure 3.5.1.8 A Delay by Time Gates B Trigger Menu
in use in line 3. To change from one source to the other, press To set the time delay after the A trigger, press button [4] and
button [6]. use the Cursor buttons (3).
Qualification Time When using a time period qualifica- To set the trigger sources and slopes for the A and B triggers,
tion, the time period is set by pressing button [6] and then select A or B using the AB Trigger button (26) and set the
using the Cursor buttons (3). source using the Trigger Source button (21) and the slope
using the +/– Slope button (27).
45
3.5.1.10 Delay by N Trigger 3.5.1.11 Divide by N Trigger

The Delay by N trigger produces a trigger on the Nth A or B The Divide by N trigger produces a trigger every N events.
20 trigger event. 20 The actual trigger point can be phase slipped so that the
trigger occurs earlier or later in the signal cycle.
40 DELAY BY N TRIGGER 40
. . . 1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Change DIVIDE BY N TRIGGER
Acquire on the Nth trigger. . . . 1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Change
60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 60 Divide the trigger rate by N and
phase
. . slip
. . the
. trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
. . . point.
Delay
. . count . . = . 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
. . (N)
Divide . . .(N). =. 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
. . count
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 (Use Trigger Position to slip phase)
3 A (CH1)
. .Source
Gate . . . . . . . . . . 5
. . . . . . . . Count
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
A (CH1)
0 . . . . . . Count
Source . . . . . . . Count . . . . . . . 5
. . . . . 1. . 2. . 3. . . . . . . . N. . . 6 0
. . . . . 1. . 2. . .. . .. N. . 1. . 2. . .. . .. N. . . 6
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trigger
. . . . 7
0
. . . . . . . . . Trigger
. . . . . . . Trigger
. . . . 7
0 0
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Figure 3.5.1.9 Delay by N Trigger Menu
Figure 3.5.1.10a Divide by N Trigger Menu
To set the number for N, press button [3] and use the Cursor
buttons (3). To set the number for N, press button [3] and use the Cursor
buttons (3).
The number of events can be set to a maximum of 9999.
This trigger mode is useful when the input signal has a
To start the count, press single shot and the trigger events
repeating pattern of triggers, for example a waveform con-
will be counted from then. In run mode the count starts
sisting of repeating groups of three pulses as shown in Figure
immediately following the end of the previous acquisition.
3.5.1.10b.
If N is set to 3 (or an integer multiple of 3) then the resulting
stable display will be a random choice of one of the three
pictures shown in Figure 3.5.1.10c.
Figure 3.5.1.10b Typical waveform for Divide by N

trigger
Figure 3.5.1.10c Possible displays from Figure 3.5.1.10.b
46
3.5.1.12 B Gates A Delayed by N Trigger 3.5.1.13 A Delayed by N Gates B Trigger

The B Gates A delayed by N trigger functions as follows: a The A delayed by N Gates B trigger functions as follows: the
20 B trigger gates the A trigger which then produces a trigger 20 B trigger path is gated by the A trigger. The gate is opened
on the Nth A event after the B trigger has occurred. on the Nth A trigger after which the first B trigger is the
40 40 trigger point.
B GATES A DELAYED BY N TRIGGER
. . . 1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Change A DELAYED BY N GATES B TRIGGER
60 Trigger B enables A triggers.
60 . . . 1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Change
Acquire
. . . on. the
. Nth . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
. . trigger. The Nth A trigger enables
acquisition
. . . . from . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
. . a .B trigger.
A Trigger
. . . count . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
. . .(N). =. 14
A Trigger
. . . count . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
. . .(N). =. 14
B (CH2)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Gate Source A (CH1)
3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
0 Gate Source
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
A (CH1) 0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Source 1 Count N
. . . . . . . . . . .Count. . . . . . . . . 6
0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
B (CH2)
. . .2 . .3 . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . N. . . 7
. . . . . . 1 Source
0. . . . . . . . . . .Gate
. . . . . . . . . 7
Trigger
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0. . . 8
Trigger
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Figure 3.5.1.11 B Gates A Delayed by N Trigger Menu
Figure 3.5.1.12 A Delayed by N Gates B Trigger Menu
To change number of A triggers required after the gate is
opened, press button [3] and use the Cursor buttons (3). To change number of A triggers before the gate is opened,
press button [3] and use the Cursor buttons (3).
The gate action is latched and is reset at the end of the
acquisition.
This trigger selection is useful in cyclic systems in which the
start of a cyclic count is the B trigger and then N Counts (A
triggers) are received to produce a trigger at a particular
angular position.
47
3.5.1.14 TV Trigger (Integra 60 Only) Acquire Line To select the required line number, use the
The TV trigger menu is used to set the parameters of the TB Trigger Position rocker switch (17) to increase or decrease
60 triggering facilities. A typical display is shown in Figure the displayed line number. Alternatively, numeric entry can
3.5.1.14 below. be used by pressing button [6] and entering the required
number with the numeric buttons.
TV Trigger As the line number scrolls to Even or Odd field line numbers,
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Change
. . . 1
the highlight in line 5 also changes field as appropriate.
Trigger
. . . On:
. .LINE
. .No.
. .SYNC
. . PULSES
. . . . . . . . . 2 Pretrigger View Pretrigger can be applied to the TB
trigger system by adjusting the pretrigger percentage using
TV. Standard:
. . . . . PAL. . NTSC
. . . . . . . . . . . . 3 the Trigger Position rocker switch (17) or by pressing
Lines: 625 525 button [8] and using numeric entry.
.Field
. . Rate:
. . 50Hz
. . . 60Hz
. . . . . . . . . . . . 4
3
TV TRIGGER
Field:
. . EVEN
. . . ODD
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
. . . 1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Change
Acquire
. . . Line
. . . . 1. . (Post
. . .↔. Set
. Line
. . No.)
. . . . 6
. . . On:
Trigger . .LINE
. . No.
. . SYNC . . . . . . . . 2
. . .PULSES
Frame
. . .Sync
. . . . O. . Line
. . Sync
. . .O . . . . . . 7
TB. FRAME
. . . .TB. LINE
. . .TB. FRAME
. . . GATES . . . 3
. . . .LINE
Pretrigger
. . . . View
. . . 0.0%
. . (Pre
. . ↔
. Set
. . %)
. . . . . . 8
. . Delay
Gate . . 33m733µs
. . . . . (Post
. . .↔.Set . . . . . . 4
. Delay)
Figure 3.5.1.14a TV Trigger Menu TV. FRAME:

. . . .A (CH1) . . . . . . . . . 5
. . . . . .Delay
O
When TB trigger is in use, the characters TV will appear on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
the second line at the left-hand side of the trace display. TB
trigger can only be used CH1 as the trigger source. O
. .TV. LINE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
The TB trigger system will reliably trigger with as little as Trigger O
. . . . View
Pretrigger . . . 0.0%
. . (Pre
. . ↔
. Set . . . . . . 8
. . %)
one division of either 525 or 625 line composite video (0.3
div sync) of either polarity.
Figure 3.5.1.14b TV Trigger Menu
Trigger ON Button [2] is used to set the trigger system to
trigger on either a specific TB line number or on sync pulses. Sync Pulses If sync pulses are selected using button [2]
If Sync Pulses are selected, the menu will change as shown (or if line 2 shows simply trigger on sync pulses), button [3]
in Figure 3.5.1.14b. If trigger tools is turned off in the can be used to select either frame or line sync pulses or a
options configuration menu, then this line simply shows: combination of both pulses where the frame pulse is used to
gate the line pulses. If required, a delay time can be included
Trigger on sync pulses. after the frame pulse.
and trigger on line number is not available. The maximum delay time that can be used with TB trigger
To trigger on a particular line without trigger tools, use the is 39.999 ms.
Frame Gates Line feature and set the delay to the required The delay time is set using the Trigger Position rocker
multiple of the line time. switch (17), or by numeric entry after pressing button [4].
TV Standard Button [3] is used to set the trigger system to Pretrigger view can also be used by using the Trigger
respond to either PAL or NTSC TV signals. Position rocker switch (17) to set the pretrigger percentage
Field Button [5] is used to select either the ODD or EVEN or by numeric entry after pressing button [8].
field for the line number trigger system. When using PAL
system, the line number in line 6 will change to the opposite
field counterpart as ODD and EVEN is toggled, i.e. line 1 to
313, etc.
48
3.6 Timebase Menu TIMEBASE MENU

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
The Timebase menu is selected by pressing the Main menu
button (12), then the corresponding Timebase menu button
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
on the instrument’s front panel. The Timebase menu is used
to select units and dual timebase modes. . . SAMPLES/s
Units: . . . . . .s/POINT
. . . . . . . . . . . . 3
TIMEBASE MENU . . Timebase:

Dual . . . . OFF
. . .ON. SLOW/FAST/SLOW
. . . . . . . . . . 4
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
. . . 1. and
Channel . . 2 .Main
. .Timebase:
. . . . . . . 200µ/Pt
. . . . 5
. . SAMPLES/s
. . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Channel 1 and 2 Main Sweeptime: 100s
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
. . Timebase:
Dual . . . . OFF
. . . . . . . . . . 3
Channel 3 and 4 Aux Timebase 2.0µs/Pt
. . . 3. and
Channel . . 4 Aux
. . Sweeptime:
. . . . . . . . . . 1s. . 7 3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Figure 3.6b Timebase Menu With Dual Timebases

SLOW/FAST/SLOW This selection offers a mode where
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 20 all channels are subject to the same timebase, but the
timebase rate changes once a trigger has been detected. All
8
channels are acquired using the Main (slow) timebase until
a trigger is detected. When a triggered event occurs, the Aux
Figure 3.6a Timebase Menu
(fast) timebase rate is in effect (for a specified number of
Units This button changes the units from Samples/s to samples) and then the timebase rate reverts back to the Main
s/Point and back. timebase rate, hence the term SLOW/FAST/SLOW.
DUAL TIMEBASE (Integra 20 Only) TIMEBASE MENU
20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
You can choose from the following selections using the Dual
Timebase button:
. . SAMPLES/s
. . . . . . . . . . . . 2
OFF This selection offers a single, MAIN timebase.
. . Timebase:
Dual . . . . OFF
. . . . . . . . . . 3
ON This selection offers a dual timebase function, which
displays the rate and sweeptime for each channel as shown . . . . . . . SLOW
. . . . . FAST
. . . . SLOW
. . . . 4
in Figure 3.6b. The dual timebase function allows the Integra Timebase: 100kS/s 500kS/s 100kS/s
to capture and observe both slow and fast events simulta- . . . . . . . 20000
Sweeplength: . . . . . 10000
. . . . .20000
. . . 5
neously by sampling at two different rates. A separate Sweeptime: 200ms 20ms 200ms
timebase is available for each channel pair, “Main” timebase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
for channels 1 and 2, and “Aux” timebase for channels 3 and SLOW Timebase rate = MAIN Timebase
4. The “Aux” timebase is always faster or equal to the . FAST
. . . Timebase
. . . . rate
. . =. AUX
. . Timebase
. . . . . . . 7
<Set rate by Time Knob & Main/Aux button>
“Main” timebase. The fastest sample rate setting in the dual
8
timebase mode is 2 µseconds per point or
500 kSamples per second.
Figure 3.6c Timebase Menu for SLOW/FAST/SLOW
The slow and fast traces are displayed separately as de-
scribed within the Trace Analysis menu shown in Figure
3.6d. Traces 5-8 display the fast timebase portion only, and
traces 1-4 display the entire acquisition SLOW/FAST/
SLOW, with the fast portion highlighted (however the data
is displayed in the slow timebase rate).
49
TRACE ANALYSIS 50,000 Point Store Length

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Execute
. . . 1
Status Slow before Fast Slow after Fast
. .
TRC1 . . .DISPLAY
. . . CH1
. . . . . LIVE
. . . . . . . 2 20,000 Points 20,000 Points
TRC2 DISPLAY CH2 LIVE Main
. .
TRC3 . . .DISPLAY
. . . CH3
. . . . . LIVE
. . . . . . . 3 TRC1 100 kS/s
TRC4 DISPLAY CH4 LIVE
TRC5
. . . . .DISPLAY
. . . AUX
. . CH1
. . . LIVE
. . . . . . . 4
TRC6 DISPLAY AUX CH2 LIVE Aux
TRC7 TRC5
. . . . .DISPLAY
. . . AUX
. . CH3
. . . LIVE
. . . . Delete
. . . 5 100 kS/s
TRC8 DISPLAY AUX CH4 LIVE
HELD
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Defaults
. . . 6
Figure 3.6e Dual Timebase Example
3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Note: The SLOW/FAST/SLOW mode is only available in
Refresh mode. The fastest timebase rate is 500 kS/s in
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
most cases it can sometimes be slightly slower,
depending on the current sweeplength setting.
Figure 3.6d Trace Analysis Menu With Dual Timebases
You can adjust the slow and fast rates using a combination
of the Timebase knob (24) and Main/Aux Timebase
button (25). The Trigger Position rocker switch (17)
simultaneously adjusts the amount of pre-trigger data col-
lected within the fast timebase and the amount of the entire
data to be collected for the first slow timebase section.
The following is an example of the SLOW/FAST/SLOW
mode. In this example, the settings are as follows:
Slow Timebase:
Rate = 100 kS/s, Sweeplength = 20,000, Sweeptime 200 ms
Fast Timebase:
Rate = 500 kS/s, Sweeplength = 10,000, Sweeptime 20 ms
50% Pretrigger is used to enable 50% Pretrigger within the
fast timebase and enable 20,000 points to be acquired for the
first slow timebase section.
Note: The fast timebase trace is presented with the trigger
point in the same position as for the slow trace so the
number of points shown in the two slow sections is
determined by the user specified trigger position and
slow to fast rates ratio. Based on these settings, the
instrument automatically calculates the number of
slow points prior to and after the fast section as
shown in the menu in Figure 3.6d and the illustration
in Figure 3.6e.
50
3.7 Display Menu Display Max/Min Because the instrument displays 500
points across the screen, when the sample length is set to
This menu controls the parameters foe the instrument’s 5000 or 50000 samples, every 10th or every 100th sample is
display. displayed. When Display Max/Min is turned on, there are
500 pairs of samples displayed. For each pair of display
DISPLAY MENU
samples the maximum and minimum acquisition samples
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status
. . . 1
are displayed in the order in which they occurred rather than
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 the actual 10th or 100th sample. This ensures that glitches
that have been acquired will be seen. Display Max/Min
. . . Type:
Display . . .YT. XY
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 operates after signals have been acquired, whereas Glitch
Detect acts on signals being acquired. If an alias is being
. . . Mode:
Display . . . REFRESH
. . . . .ROLL
. . . . . . . . . 4 displayed (see Section 1.6.3) it will probably be displayed as
a wave envelope formed from the maximum and minimum 3
. . Dot
Trace . . Join:
. . OFF
. . .ON. . . . . . . . . . . 5 samples.
. . . Max/Min:
Display . . . . OFF
. . ON
. . . . . . . . . . . 6
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Figure 3.7 Display Menu

Status Selects the Current Status menu. See Section 3.7.1.
XY This button turns XY display mode on and off. In XY
mode, the CH1 input signal controls the X (horizontal)
component of the trace and the other channel inputs control
the Y (vertical) component of the trace. See Section 2.3.3.
Display Mode Either the Refresh or Roll mode can be
selected. The Refresh mode (as described in Section 2.3.1)
imitates the style of a conventional real-time oscilloscope
and the display is plotted from left to right. The Roll mode
(as described in Section 2.3.2) is like a chart recorder,
scrolling from right to left. The Roll mode also activates the
Integra 20 direct recording to internal hard disk and direct
recording to internal thermal plotter modes. The direct
recording function is described in Sections 3.8.4.2 (thermal
plotter) and 3.11.2 (internal hard disk).
Trace Dot Join The individual dots making up a displayed
trace can be joined together using this function. If trace dot
join is Off, gaps can be seen between the sample points on
some traces, depending on the signal content. Selecting On
causes the dots to be automatically joined by straight vertical
lines.
51
3.7.1 Current Status Menu 3.8 Utility Menu

The Current Status menu allows the various horizontal, The Utility menu is selected by pressing the Main menu
vertical and trigger settings of the instrument to be viewed. button (12) then the corresponding Utility button on the
A typical display is shown in Figure 3.7.1. instrument’s front panel. The Utility menu is used to select
various Utility functions.
CURRENT STATUS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Return
. . . 1 UTILITY MENU
F.S. + –
CH1 : 40V x1 GND GND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
. .
CH2 : .40V
. . x1. . . DC. . . . . . . . . . . . 2
DC
CH3 : 40V x1 DC DC
CH4 : .40V I/O. Setup
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
. . . . x1. . . GND
. . GND
. . . . . . . . . . 3
. .Limits
Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Store
. . Length:
. . . 50,000
. . . . . Sweep
. . . Time:
. . 500µs
. . . . . 4
3 Mode: REFRESH
Main: 2ms Zoom: 200µs (x10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Preferences
. . TR1M
View . . .TR1Z
. . TR2M
. . . TR4Z
. . . . . . . . . . 5
A Trigger Mode: Edge . .Configuration
Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
. . . CH1
Source: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Pretrigger: 0.0% . . . . . Mode:
Master/Slave . . . OFF
. . .SLAVE
. . . MASTER
. . . . . . 6
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Level: 0.00 DIVs (0.00V)
Sensitivity: 0.00 DIVs (0.00V) . . . .Setup
Recorder . . Menu
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
. . . . 2. . Glitch
Averaging: . . .Detect:
. . . OFF
. . . . . . . . 8
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Figure 3.7.1 A Typical Status Display
Figure 3.8 Utility Menu
Return Pressing button [1] returns the display to the previ-
ous menu. I/O Setup Menu The I/O Setup menu provides access to
CH1 to 4 Following the channel number, the channel input the instrument’s Input/Output settings. See Section 3.8.1.
sensitivity is shown in full scale. The input coupling is also Test Limits Menu The Test Limits menu provides access
shown. This can be AC, DC or GND. to the limits testing functions. See Section 3.8.2.
Store Length This is the number of data points captured Preferences Menu The Preferences menu provides ac-
per sweep, sweep time is the time per point multiplied by the cess to the instrument’s basic or preference settings. See
sweep length, as described in Section 3.4. Section 3.8.3.
Mode There are four possible display modes: Refresh, Roll, Plot Configuration Menu The Plot Configuration menu
XY and Persistence. They are all described in Section 2.3. provides access to the instrument’s plotting settings. See
Main The sweep rate of the timebase is shown in s, ms, µs Section 3.8.4.
or ns per division. Master/Slave Mode Allows two or more instruments to
10 acquire data in trigger sync. Units are connected together via
Zoom The status of any zoom factor can be either ×1, ×2,
×5, ×10, ×20, ×50, ×100 ×200, ×500 or ×1000. See Section the Master/Slave trigger in/trigger out rear panel BNCs. The
15 unit to establish the trigger is known as the Master unit,
1.6.5.
which in turn sends the trigger signal to the Slave unit
View The displayed traces are shown. See Sections 1.5.1 20 receiving the trigger. Both units must be Arm’d to acquire
and 3.13. data before triggering in sync can be accomplished.
Trigger Mode The selected trigger options are shown in 40
this part of the display including source, pretrigger, level,
and sensitivity. See Sections 1.8 and 3.5.
Averaging If averaging is on, the averaging factor is Recorder Setup Menu (Only on the Integra 20 with Roll
20 mode selected.) Enables setting of the event markers and the
shown as 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, or 1024.
recording duration for direct recording to internal hard disk
Glitch Detect The status of the Glitch Detect system is and direct recording to internal thermal plotter modes. See
shown, either Off or On. Section 3.8.5.
52
3.8.1 I/O Setup Menu Bulk Transfer This option is used to select the data format
for bulk transfers. The format can be either BINARY, or
I/O SETUP TEXT. Binary mode is not compatible with RS423 commu-
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Return
. . . 1 nications using XON/XOFF handshaking because of the
special handshaking characters which could also appear as
. . .Setup
RS423 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
data characters. In binary mode the data is transmitted as
. . Setup
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
‘Definite Arbitrary Block Response Data’† and is in the
GPIB
form #NLDDD...DD.
. . . Controller:
Remote . . . . GPIB
. . . RS423
. . . . . . . . . . 4 Where:
. . . Plotter:
External . . . GPIB
. . .RS423
. . . PARALLEL
. . . . . . . . 5 N is a single digit and is the length of the length data. It
will be either 1, 2 or 3
. .Transfer:
Bulk . . . BINARY
. . . . TEXT
. . . . . . . . . . . 6
L is the length of the data transmission in bytes. This 3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 could be one two or three digits long.
DDD...DD is typically 502, 5020, 10040, 50200, 100400,
. .Word
Bulk . . Size:
. . 8BIT
. . 16BIT
. . . . . . . . . . . . 8
or 200800 bytes of binary trace data as used by the scope.
Segmented stores have the same number of bytes as non
Figure 3.8.1 The I/O Master Menu segmented stores.
RS423 Menu This button selects the RS423 menu, which In TEXT mode each item of trace data is converted to ASCII
is used to define the RS423 port characteristics. See Section data before transmission as ‘Numeric Response Data’† in
3.8.1.1. the number base defined by the Radix entry.
GPIB Menu This line only appears if the Remote Controller Radix This line only appears if the data format for bulk
is selected to be GPIB. See Section 3.8.1.2 for the GPIB transfers is set to TEXT. The numeric base for the data can
Setup menu. be selected to be OCTAL, DECIMAL or HEXADECIMAL.
Remote Controller This option is used to select the When set to OCTAL, each data byte is preceded by #Q and
function of the GPIB and RS423 ports. Pressing button [4] the data is ‘Octal Numeric Response Data’†.
toggles the function of the two ports. One port is for a plotter
When set to DECIMAL, the data is ‘NR1 Numeric Response
and one for remote control. When the GPIB port is set to be
Data’†.
the plot output, the message Plotter Listen Only appears
under line 5 and the GPIB menu is not selectable. When set to HEXADECIMAL, each data byte is preceded
by #H and the data is ‘Hexadecimal Numeric Response
External Plotter This option is used to select the function
Data’†.
of the GPIB and RS423 ports. Pressing button [5] toggles the
function of the two ports. One port is for a plotter and one for † Definite Arbitrary Block Response Data, NR1 Numeric
remote control. When the GPIB port is set to be the plot Response Data, Octal Numeric Response Data, and Hexa-
output, the message Plotter Listen Only appears between decimal Numeric Response Data are all defined in the
lines 5 and 6. IEEE–488.2 specification and their use in the DSO con-
forms to that standard.
In addition to the standard HPGL plotter output, the Integra
series of instruments support HP DeskJet and laser printers Bulk Word Size When performing bulk transfers, the
via the rear panel parallel port when using the HP DeskJet word size can be set to be either 8 bits or 16 bits by pressing
(mono) driver selection. See Section 3.8.4. button [8].
When transferring 16 bit data in Binary mode, the high and
low bytes are sent alternately, high byte first.
When transferring 16 bit data in Text mode complete 16 bit
words are sent.
53
3.8.1.1 RS423 Setup Menu 3.8.1.2 GPIB Setup Menu

This menu allows the RS423 communication parameters to GPIB SETUP
be set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Return
. . . 1
RS423 SETUP . . Address:

GPIB . . . .07. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Return
. . . 1
. . OFF
EOI: . . ON
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
. . Rate:
Baud . . 38400
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
. . Bits:
Parity . . OFF
. . EVEN
. . . ODD
. . .MARK
. . SPACE
. . . . . . 3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
. .Bits:
Data . . 7 .8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
3 . .Bits:
Stop . . 1 .2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
. . . . .OFF
Handshake: . . XON/XOFF
. . . . .CTS/RTS
. . . . . . . . 6
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
. . And
Echo . .Prompt:
. . . OFF
. . ON
. . . . . . . . . . . 7
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Figure 3.8.1.2 GPIB Setup Menu

GPIB Address The GPIB address can be set to any number
Figure 3.8.1.1 RS423 Port Menu from 1 to 31 by pressing button [2]. The DSO is then in
numeric entry mode and the required address number is
Data communication is always with one start bit. Other data
entered by pressing the appropriate cursor buttons. The
parameters can be set using buttons [2] to [7].
default selection is device 14.
Baud Rate Pressing button [2] steps through the possible
EOI EOI (End or Identify) can automatically be inserted at
baud rates, which are 110, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600
the end of each transmission if ON is selected with button
and 38400 baud.
[3]. The EOI is a dedicated bus line which can be used in
Parity The parity can be set to NONE (Off), EVEN, ODD, addition to carriage return and line feed to denote the end of
MARK, or SPACE by successive presses of button [3]. a transmission and/or the end of a block.
When the parity is set to MARK, the parity bit is always sent
If the GPIB port is selected as the plotter port then this menu
and it is always set to a logic 1. When the parity is set to
is not available.
SPACE, the parity bit is always sent and it is always set to a
logic 0.
Data Bits Each byte of data can be sent as either 7 or 8 bits
as shown by the highlighted option selected with button [4].
Stop Bits Either one or two stop bits can be sent as selected
by button [5].
Handshake Communication handshaking can be set using
button [6]. Handshaking can be turned off or set to XON/
XOFF (software) or CTS/RTS (hardware) handshaking.
Echo & Prompt This line only appears when the RS423
port is set to Remote. All characters sent to the DSO will be
echoed back to the transmitting device and a prompt sent to
the user if this option is set to on using button [7].
54
3.8.2 Test Limits Menu Limit traces are only plotted if display limits is turned on in
line 6. See Section 3.8.3.
The Test Limits menu is selected by pressing the Main menu
button (12), the corresponding Utility button, and finally the Limits testing is performed on all the memory of both the
corresponding Test Limits button on the front panel. This upper and lower limit traces within the area bounded by the
menu is always transparent and is used to set and control all cursor and time reference lines.
aspects of limits testing.
Limit testing can be turned On or Off or set to Stop–on–Fail
TEST LIMITS
by pressing button [6]. When turned on, each successive
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Return
. . . 1
acquisition is tested and a warning message displayed when
a trace is outside the limits. This warning and trace is
. Upper
Set . . . Limit
. . (TR1M)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 overwritten by the next acquisition.
If the limits mode is set to Stop–on–Fail, acquisitions are
. Lower
Set . . . Limit
. . (TR1M)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
halted when a trace that is outside the limits is captured, 3
. . Size
Band . . (vertical
. . . divisions):
. . . . 0.2
. . . . . . . . . 4 allowing it to be examined. This screen picture can be
plotted and the area between the upper and lower limits can
. Limits
Set . . .Using
. . Band
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 be shown filled with vertical lines.
Test Limits only operates when the DSO is in Refresh mode
Test
. .Limits:
. . OFF
. . .ON. STOP
. . . ON
. FAIL
. . . . . . . . 6
in either YT or XY modes. Limits test is not available in Roll
Display
. . .Limits
. . (TRC8):
. . . .OFF
. . ON
. . . . . . . . . 7 mode. If an attempt to select Limits testing is made when the
instrument is not in refresh mode, an error message is
Plot
. On
. . Fail:
. . OFF
. . ON
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 displayed.
Display Limits are not displayed in any mode other than YT
Figure 3.8.2 Limits Testing Menu refresh.
To select which display trace is to be used as either the upper
or lower limit, position the cursor on it using the Select 3.8.3 Preferences Menu
Trace (Enter) button (9). The trace names in both lines 2
and 3 show the current cursor trace. The Preferences menu is selected by selecting Preferences
from the Utility Menu (which is selected from the Main
Set Upper and Lower Limits The upper and lower limits menu). The Preferences menu is used to set various basic
to be tested against are set by selecting the desired trace with instrument settings.
the cursor and then pressing either button [2] or [3] as
required. When a limit has been set, the message UPPER PREFERENCES
LIMIT SET or LOWER LIMIT SET as appropriate is briefly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Return
. . . 1
displayed at the bottom of the screen.
Display
. . . Color
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Set Limits Using Band A limit that consists of a band
above and below a trace can be set by pressing button [5]. Menu
. . Transparancy:
. . . . . . OFF
. . .ON
. . . . . . . . . 3
The width of the band is set by pressing button [4] and
entering the required band size, which can be from 0.2 to 1 Options
. . . Configuration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
division.
Set
. Time
. . .& Date
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
If Display Limits is turned on using button [6], the limit 14:17:07 06-10-97
traces are displayed as trace 8 and the band between the Graticule
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
upper and lower limits is shaded.
Keyclicks:
. . . . OFF
. . .ON. . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Figure 3.8.3 The Preferences Menu
55
Display Color Menu The Display Color menu provides 3.8.3.1 Display Color Menu
you with a means of setting the colors of various display
This menu is used to change the color of any of the items
items. See Section 3.8.3.1.
contributing to the overall display. This menu is always
Option Configuration Menu The Option Configuration overlaid on the trace display so that the colors of the display
menu is used to turn options on and off and to install new items can be viewed as they are changed.
options. See Section 3.8.3.2.
DISPLAY COLOR
Set Time & Date Menu The current time and date held by . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Return
. . . 1
the instrument is displayed below this line. If required, these TR1M
settings can be changed by selecting the Set Time and Date . .
TR1Z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
menu by pressing button [5]. See Section 3.8.3.3. TR2M
TR2Z
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Graticule Menu The Graticule menu is used to define the TR3M
3 way in which the graticule is displayed on the instrument’s TR3Z
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
screen. See Section 3.8.3.4. TR4M
TR4Z
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Change
. . . 5
Menu Transparency The menus can be set so that they TR5M
are either “see–through” (transparent) or solid. When they TR5Z
. .
TR6M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Default
. . . 1. 6
are transparent, the trace display and the menus are on the
TR6Z
screen at the same time, allowing the effects of menu items . .
TR7M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Default
. . . 2. 7
to be seen as they are changed. TR7Z
. .
TR8M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
When Menu Transparency is off, selecting a menu replaces
the trace display with the menu display.
Figure 3.8.3.1 Display Color Menu
Menu Transparency works with all menus except the Dis-
play Color menu and the Test Limits menu, which are An item is selected by using buttons [2] and [3] to scroll
always transparent. through the list of items. The color of the highlighted item
can be changed by selecting Change with button [5]. This
Keyclicks This line turns the Keyclick feature on and off.
causes the Customize Color menu to be displayed.
If Keyclicks are turned on then each time a front panel
control is pressed a keyclick will sound giving a positive The colors can also be remotely set and modified using either
indication that the action was recognized. the RS423 or IEEE 488 interfaces.
The complete list of items that can be individually colored is
as follows.
Defaults
The instrument is preset with two sets of defaults for the
colors of the display items. These color sets can be reverted
to at any time.
Default 1 To set all display items back to their Default 1
colors, press button [6]. This set of colors has a black
background with all items set to a usable selection. The
zoom trace colors are similar to their respective main traces.
Default 2 To set all display items back to their Default 2
colors, press button [7]. This set of colors has a white
background with all items set to a usable selection. The
zoom trace colors are similar to their respective main traces.
56
3.8.3.1.1 Customize Color Menu 3.8.3.2 Options Configuration Menu

The item selected is shown under the menu title. The levels The Options Configuration menu is selected by pressing the
of the three colors which contribute to the actual color of the Main menu button (12), then the corresponding Utility
selected item can be increased or decreased using buttons [2] button, then the corresponding Preferences button, and
to [7] respectively. finally the corresponding Options Configuration button on
the instrument’s front panel. The Option Configuration
CUSTOMIZE COLOR menu is used to turn on and off instrument options and to
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Return
. . . 1 install new options.
GRATICULE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 OPTIONS CONFIGURATION
(Cursor < >) Red 35 % . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Return
. . . 1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
. 12345678
SN. . . . . .s/w. V1.00
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Green 80 % . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option . Status
. . . . . . . 3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
THERMAL PLOTTER OFF
. . . .CARD
MEMORY . . . . . . . . . OFF
. . . . . . . 4
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 HARD DISK ON
Blue 80 % FLOPPY
. . . DISK
. . . . . . . . . . ON
. . . Upgrade
. . . . 5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 RAM DISK 1Mb ON
GPIB
. . . . . . . . . . . . . ON
. . . . Off/On
. . . 6
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 XY CURSOR MEASUREMENTS OFF
ANALYSIS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . ON
. . . . . . . 7
SEQUENCES ON
Figure 3.8.3.1.1 Customize Color Menu CHANNEL SCALING ON
. . . . . . . . . . . .
CUSTOM MEASUREMENTS
. ON
. . . . . . . 8
Each press of a button changes the level by 5%, holding a
button down causes the level to step through the levels until Figure 3.8.3.2 Options Configuration Menu
either 100% or 0% is reached.
To add a new option to an instrument:
To select, for instance, primary red, set Red to 100% and
both Green and Blue to 0%. For magenta set Red and Blue 1. If it is a hardware option, first physically install it in the
to 100% and Green to 0%, and for white, set all three colors instrument, following the instructions supplied with the
to 100%. hardware.
A good orange can be created by setting Red to 100%, Green 2. Select the new option from the list using buttons [2] and
to 50% and Blue to 0%. [3]. When the option is highlighted, press the Upgrade
button [5] and the display changes to the Authorization
CAUTION: If the color of the alphanumerics is set to Code entry pad.
the same as the background, no menus or
text will be visible. If the new option is a hardware device, enter the three digit
number of the device supplied with your order.
If this situation occurs, press the Main If the new option is software, enter the eight digit code
menu button (12), select the Utility menu
number supplied with your order.
[6], select the Preferences menu [4], select
the Display menu [2], and finally, press Once an option has been added and authorized, it can be
button [6] twice to restore the colors to activated or disabled as required using button [6]. You may
default selection 1. want to turn off some features to simplify some of the menus
OR
and thus the instrument operation. For instance, if the only
Perform a “cold boot” as described in
Section1.3.2. memory device required for a particular job is the floppy
disk, the other devices can be turned off so that they do not
appear in the Save and Recall Menus.
57
3.8.3.3 Set Time and Date Menu Date The current time shown on this line can be changed by
pressing button [6]. Once button [6] has been pressed, the
The DSO is fitted with a real time clock, which is set from
first digit of the date is shown in inverse video. To change
the Set Time and Date menu. The clock is kept running even
this number, press the up/down Cursor buttons (3). The
with the power disconnected for at least a month by its own
highlight then moves to the next digit when pressing the right
internal battery.
Cursor button (3). Repeat this until all digits have been
The current date and time together with the date and time of entered. To skip a number or return to a previous digit, the
acquisition appear on any screen plot. left/right Cursor buttons (3) can be used to move the
highlight along this line.
SET TIME AND DATE Format The date format can be switched between European
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Return
. . . 1 or American formats using button [7]. Once a format has
been selected, all places where dates are used, such as plots
3 . Clock
Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 and GPIB/RS423 commands, use and plot in that format.
+/– 30 Second Adjust to 00 Pressing button [8] forces
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
the current time to jump to the nearest whole minute and zero
HH:MM:SS
. . 14
Time: . :. 19. : .53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 seconds, i.e. forward or backwards a maximum of 30 sec-
onds. If the time is from 1 to 29 seconds, the time jumps back
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 and if it is from 30 to 59 seconds, the time jumps to the next
MM-DD-YY minute.
Date:
. . 06
. -. 10. - .97. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Format:
. . . MM-DD-YY
. . . . . DD-MM-YY
. . . . . . . . . . . . 7
+/-. 30
. Second
. . . Adjust
. . . to.00. . . . . . . . . . . 8
Figure 3.8.3.3 A Date and Time Menu

Set Clock Once the correct date and time has been set and
the Select Trace (Enter) button (9) has been pressed, line 2
appears and then pressing button [2] enters the data. This
makes it easy to set a time that is a few seconds in advance
of the real time, then press button [2] at a time signal. If the
menu is exited without pressing button [2] the date and time
will remain unchanged.
Time The current time shown on this line can be changed by
pressing button [4]. Once button [4] has been pressed, the
first digit of the time is shown in inverse video. To change
this number, press the up/down Cursor buttons (3). The
highlight then moves to the next digit when pressing the right
Cursor button (3). Repeat this until all digits have been
entered. To skip a number or return to a previous digit, the
left/right Cursor buttons (3) can be used to move the
highlight along this line.
58
3.8.3.4 Graticule Menu 3.8.4 Plot Configuration Menu

This menu is used to change the settings of the graticule on This menu allows various plot parameters to be set.
the display.
PLOT CONFIGURATION
GRATICULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Return
. . . 1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Return
. . . 1
To:. INTERNAL
. . . . . EXTERNAL
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
. . . . OFF
Graticule: . . ON
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
. . .Date
Labels, . .and
. Cursors:
. . . . OFF
. . ON
. . . . . . . . 3
. . . OFF
Border: . . BROKEN
. . . . SOLID
. . . . . . . . . . . 3
. . . . OFF
Graticule: . . ON
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
. . Axes:
Major . . .OFF
. . ON
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Limits
. . (TRC8):
. . . .OFF. . FILLED
. . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Minor
. . Axes:
. . .OFF
. . BROKEN
. . . . SOLID
. . . . . . . . . 5 (Only applies when Test Limits active) 3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Plotter
. . Type:
. . .HPGL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Plot Length as Screen Widths:
1. 2. 3. 5. 10. 20
. . 50. 100
. . . . . . . . . . . . 8
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Figure 3.8.4 A Plotter Configuration Menu
Figure 3.8.3.4 Graticule Menu
There are several possible plot types that can be set from this
Various parts of the display graticule can be controlled menu. They are: plots to an internal thermal plotter (if fitted)
individually with the current settings shown in inverse video and plots to an external plotter via either the Parallel, RS423
or GPIB interface.
Graticule All the graticule lines (Border, Major Axes and
Minor Axes) can be turned on and off using button [2]. The Many of the features set on this menu are common to each
normal setting is on. of the plotter types and they are discussed below. Features
unique to individual plotter types are described under the
Border Outside the graticule there is a border which can be
appropriate headings.
set to be a solid line, a broken line or it can be turned off. The
normal setting is solid. Trace plots contain a complete copy of the instrument’s
display, including the reference lines and measurement
Major Axes The major axes are the center two lines of the
cursor, if they are turned on. Menu plots are simply a copy
graticule which form a cross in the center of the display.
of the screen display. Transparent menu plots are a complete
They contain the 0.2 division markers. The normal setting is
copy of the display, including both trace and menu data.
on.
To Line 2 allows the required plot destination to be selected.
Minor Axes The minor axes are the division markers on the
When only one destination is available, i.e. when either an
display there are 8 vertical divisions and 10 horizontal
internal plotter is not fitted, this line simply displays EX-
divisions. These axes can be set to be off, solid lines or
TERNAL and does not allow any selection.
broken lines. The normal setting is broken.
Internal Choose this option if an internal thermal plotter is
fitted and is required to be the plot destination.
External This item should be selected if the required plot
destination is an external plotter connected via either the
Parallel, GPIB or RS423 ports.
The DSO communicates with an external plotter on the
GPIB and RS423 ports using HPGL.
For GPIB plots, the plotter must be in listen only mode.
Note: In order for GPIB plots to function correctly, all the
address switches on an HP7475 plotter must be
switched to 1.
59
To output to the parallel port and select the external plot type, 3.8.4.1 Plot/Print Driver Menu
ensure that External is selected as the destination on line 2 of
To change the plotter type, press button [7] and select the
the Plot Configuration menu and that Parallel is selected on
required printer or plotter from the list shown in the Plot/
line 4 of the I/O menu. Line 7 and 8 of the Plot configuration
Driver menu.
Menu will then show the current selection, for example:
Note: When using a laser printer, select HP DeskJet (mono).
Plotter Type: HPGL . . . . . . . . . . . 7
External Plotter: GPIB RS423 PARALLEL . 8 PLOT/PRINT DRIVER MENU
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select
. . . 1
Labels, Dates and Cursors All the alphanumerics that
can appear on the plots can be included or omitted depending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
HPGL
on the highlighted option selected with button [3]. HP DeskJet (mono)
HP. DeskJet
. . . (color)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
3 If the alphanumerics are turned on, all the on screen label-
ling, including GPIB entries, cursors and waveform pro- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cancel
. . . 4
cessing measurements are reproduced on the plots.
This selection does not affect menu plotting, which will . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
always appear if a menu is displayed.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Graticule On any external plotter, the graticule can be
plotted as solid or broken lines or omitted from the plots by . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
selecting the required option using button [4]. If an internal
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
thermal plotter is fitted, the graticule, if selected, is always
broken lines.
Figure 3.8.4.1 A Typical Plot/Print Driver Menu
Limits When the limits display feature is turned on and the
internal plotter is selected, line 5 appears. This is used to When using an external pen plotter, the pen colors are set as
determine how the limits traces are plotted. This item is only 15 shown in the table below so that the colors on the plot will
available when the plot length is set to a screen width of 1. be as good a match as possible to the colors on the display .
Limits can be omitted (OFF), shown as ordinary trace
20
Pen No. Color
LINES or the area between them can be FILLED with 1 Black
vertical lines. The choice is made using button [5]. 40 2 Red
3 Green
Plot Length as Screen Widths This line only appears if
4 Blue
an internal thermal plotter is fitted to the instrument. The 60
trace display is expanded to produce a plot that is the number
of screen widths selected. This is useful because each screen
width consists of 500 display points so that, for instance,
with a 50 k trace and 100 screen widths, every acquired data
point is plotted.
Selecting a 100 screen plot with a 500 point store is likely to
produce a strange looking plot as there will only be one true
data point for every two of the 1000 plotted divisions (100
screens × 10 divisions). If the trace is also zoomed, there will
be even fewer data points per plotted division.
If one screen width is selected, the displayed data is directly
transferred to the plotter so envelope plotting mode is not
available.
60
The pin connections for the RS423 interface are listed below 3.8.4.2 Direct Recording to Internal Plotter
in Table 3.8.4.1a and typical connection diagrams for RS423
This function enables direct real time recording to the
interfacing cables are shown below in Table 3.8.4.1b. 15 internal plotter (Integra 15 and Integra 20 only). To perform
RS423 Port a direct recording to the internal hard disk, see Section
Pin Function 20 3.11.2.
2 TXD (out) Note: The Direct Recording function is only available
3 RXD (in) when the Roll mode is selected in the Utility menu
5 Ground under the Display menu, as shown below.
7 CTS (in)
8 RTS (out) DISPLAY MENU
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status
. . . 1
Table 3.8.4.1a RS423 Port 3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
DSO
(9 way plug) HP 7475 (25 way plug) Display
. . . Type:
. . .YT. XY
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Display
. . . Mode:
. . . REFRESH
. . . . .ROLL
. . . . . . . . . 4
2 3
3 2
Trace
. . Dot
. . Join:
. . OFF
. . .ON. . . . . . . . . . . 5
5 1
5 7 Display
. . . Max/Min:
. . . . OFF
. . ON
. . . . . . . . . . . 6
7 20
8 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Figure 3.8.4.1b RS423 Interface Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Note: When using an HP 7475, the handshake should be set
to CTS/RTS in the RS423 menu. Figure 3.8.4.2a Display Menu With Roll Mode Selected
Maximum direct recording to plotter acquisition rate is
4 cm per second, or 200 ms/div timebase rate.
To set up a recording, proceed to the Utility menu and select
the Recorder Setup menu.
UTILITY MENU
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
I/O. Setup
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
. .Limits
Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Preferences
. .Configuration
Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
. . . . . Mode:
Master/Slave . . . OFF
. . .SLAVE
. . . MASTER
. . . . . . 6
. . . .Setup
Recorder . . Menu
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Figure 3.8.4.2b Utility Menu
61
This menu is used to set the event markers and the recording and seconds (HHHMMSS) can be entered (see Figure
duration for both the direct recording to internal hard disk 3.8.4.2d).
and direct recording to internal thermal plotter modes.
RECORD DURATION
RECORDER MENU Done 1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Return
. . . 1 Ref (<--> ) moves selection.
0123456789_∞ Inc 2
. . .Event
Display . . Markers:
. . . . OFF
. . ON
. . . . . . . . . 2
Dec 3
. . Marker
Event . . . A:'MarkerA'
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Cancel 4
. . Marker
Event . . . B:'MarkerB'
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Clear 5
3 . . Marker
Event . . . C:'MarkerC'
. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . 5
Delete 6
. . Maximum
Show . . . . Record
. . . Duration
. . . . . . . . . . . 6
HHHMMSS 7
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Cursor (<-->) moves entry point.
0000012 Insert 8
HHH:MM:SS
. . .Duration:
Record . . . 0. 0 .0 : .0 0.: 1.2 . . . . . . . . . 8
Figure 3.8.4.2d Record Duration Menu
Figure 3.8.4.2c Recorder Menu
A direct to internal plotter recording can be started by
Event markers can be toggled on or off using button [2]. initiating the Live mode (while displaying the waveform
Each event marker A through C can have a custom name up screen, press the Live button (19) on the front panel), then
to nineteen characters long. Using buttons [3], [4], or [5] press the Plot button (8) on the front panel to begin the
cause the Event Marker entry pad to be displayed, where you recording.
can choose from the entire set of characters and numbers. A recording can be cancelled at any time by pressing the
Cancel button (5) on the front panel.
EVENT MARKER TEXT
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Done
. . 1 While a recording is underway, a set of three separate
Ref (<--> ) moves selection. markers can be generated at any time, and as many times as
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ needed during the recording. The screen displays text during
0123456789_Sp the recording to indicate that buttons [2], [3], and [4]
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
correspond to Markers A, B, and C respectively. This
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cancel
. . . 4
enables easy identification of important events during replay
of the recording.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Clear
. . 5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete
. . . 6
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Cursor (<-->) moves entry point.
THIS
. IS
. .EVENT
. . .MARKA
. . . . . . . . . . . .Insert
. . 8
Figure 3.8.4.2d Event Marker Text Menu

Pressing button [6] in the Recorder menu displays the
maximum record duration based on the current acquisition
settings.
Pressing button [8] in the Recorder menu displays the
Record Duration entry pad, form which the hours, minutes
62
The recorded plot provides information such as: 3.9 Sequence Menu
Start Date This is the date when the recording was started. Sequences of events can be programmed and replayed in this
Start Time This is the time when the recording was started.
15 instrument using the Sequences Status menu. Using this
feature, repetitive complex series of operations can easily be
Marker A, B, C Locations These are locations where the 20 automated. The sequences feature is available on the Integra
markers occurred. 20 with the sequences option only.
Labels All the signals are labeled with their respective 40 Up to eight sequences can be programmed, from up to a total
channels. of 240 steps in any combination.
Sensitivity Settings Sensitivity settings are plotted for all 60 This menu is reached by pressing the Main menu button
channels recorded. (12) and then the corresponding Sequence menu button.
Timebase Setting Timebase setting is plotted along the x
SEQUENCES STATUS
3
axis.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Run
. . 1
Timebase Markers Markers A, B, and C are plotted along
the x axis. . .
SEQ . . . . .
NAME . KEY
. . .RUN
. .CYCLES
. . . . . . . 2
1 PAUSE 1
Chart recorder plots can also be generated from previous 2 . . INPUT
. . . . . . .3 . . .1 . . . . . . . . 3
3 HOLDSCAN 2 111
direct recordings to disk. See Section 3.11.2 for details. 4 INFINITY 4 ∞
5 . . CONTINUE
. . . . . . . . . .1 . . . . . . . . 4
6 NEST 1 1
7 NEST2 1
8 . . . . .3 . .
NEST . . . . .1 . . . . .Change
. . . 5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Clear
. . 6
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
View/Learn/Edit
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Figure 3.9 Sequences Status Menu

This menu shows the current status of the eight sequences.
It shows their name, the soft key allocated to them and the
number of times a particular sequence will run when the Run
button is pressed.
Run To run a sequence, press button [1]. The sequence runs
the number of times shown against its entry and specified on
line 3 of the Sequence menu.
When a sequence has finished running, the message SE-
QUENCE RUN COMPLETE appears on the display.
To stop a sequence running, press the Cancel button (5).
The sequence is stopped and the message SEQUENCE
RUN ABORTED is displayed.
63
Each sequence step takes, on average, 150 ms to complete. 3.9.1 Sequence Setup
Change To To modify a sequence, select it using buttons [2] Pressing button [5] in the Sequences Status menu causes the
and [3] and then press button [5]. The Sequence menu is then Sequence Setup menu to be displayed.
displayed from which the sequence attributes and the se-
quence itself can be changed. SEQUENCE SETUP
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Return
. . . 1
Clear To To clear an existing sequence, press button [6].
This deletes every entry in the sequence, removes it from the . . . . 8. Name:
Sequence: . . . NEST
. . .3. . . . . . . . . 2
list and resets the name to SEQ1 to 8 as appropriate. Because
a deleted sequence cannot be recovered, you must confirm . .Cycles:
Run . . .1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
this action with a second press of button [6] before the
deletion occurs. . Key
Soft . . Label:
. . . OFF
. . 2. 3. 4 . . . . . . . . . . 4
3 View/Learn/Edit Pressing button [7] selects the sequence . Sequence
Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
entry mode, which allows items to be entered into the
selected sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Rename
Exit Learn Mode This line appears only if this menu is . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

View/Learn/Edit
entered while learning a sequence. Pressing it exits the learn
mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Figure 3.9.1 The Sequence Setup Menu

From this menu, the attributes of the selected sequence can
be set or changed.
When this menu is entered, the selected sequence is the one
highlighted in the Sequence Status menu. To select another
sequence, press button [2] until the required sequence is
shown in line 2.
Run Cycles A sequence can be set to run from 0 to 999
cycles or infinity. Press button [3] to change the display to
the Run Cycles entry pad from which the required number
can be entered.
Soft Key Label Sequences can be assigned to either “Soft
Key” 2, 3 or 4 so that they may be run from the trace display.
To assign a label to the sequence, press button [4] until the
required key number is highlighted.
Plot Sequence To plot the sequence, press button [5]. The
sequence is plotted as a list of events while the instrument
remains in the Sequence Setup menu.
Rename To name or rename the sequence, press button [6]
and the display changes to the Sequence Name entry pad
from which an eight character name can be entered.
View/Learn/Edit Pressing button [7] selects the sequence
entry mode, which allows items to be entered into the
selected sequence.
Exit Learn Mode This line appears only if this menu is
entered while learning a sequence. Pressing it exits the learn
mode.
64
3.9.2 Editing or Learning a Sequence LEARNING SEQUENCE 1

When View/Learn/Edit is pressed in either the Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SELECT
. . . . 1
Status or Sequence Setup menus, the display changes to the
Sequence Learn page. This page lists the sequence steps for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
MESSAGE: * *
the selected sequence. OUTPUT
. . . SIGNAL
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
PAUSE HH:MM:SS : :
PLOT
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cancel
. . . 4
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exit
. . 1 PRINT
SEQUENCE (APPEND) RECALL
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Time
. . 5
0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 SAVE
1 UNLOCK FRONT PANEL
. . . . . . . . . .
WAIT FOR INPUT SIGNAL
. . . . . . . . . . 6
2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
3 WAIT FOR SOFT KEY
4 . . . . . . . . . . .ON
WAIT . TRIGGER
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 3
. . . . . . . . . . . 4
5 WAIT UNTIL CONTINUE
6 . .UNTIL
WAIT . . STORED
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rename
. . . . 5
7
8
9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete
. . . 6 Figure 3.9.2b Learning Sequence Menu
10
BEEP Selecting BEEP adds a short beep into the sequence
11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
12 so that for instance a user’s attention can be attracted
13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .More
. . 8 immediately prior to a “wait for soft key” command.
CALL SEQ1 ...8 Another sequence can be called from any
Figure 3.9.2a The Learn/Edit Sequence Menu other sequence so that if desired, a longer sequence can be
created or a particular routine run at several points during a
The cursor position is indicated by the inverse video charac-
sequence without having to recreate it each time it is re-
ters on the appropriate line. Buttons [2] & [3] move the
quired.
cursor forwards and backwards through the sequence (up
and down on the display). COMMENT A message can be inserted into a sequence for
documentation purposes, so that when a sequence list is
A sequence is automatically generated by operating the
plotted, the sequence is commented. The text for the com-
instrument’s controls. An entry is retained when the next
ment, which can be up to 18 characters long, is entered using
control selection is made, e.g. Volts/div can be changed
the Comment Entry pad obtained by pressing button [5].
from 2 mV to 1 V through the intermediate steps and only
result in one sequence step. When another control is oper- GOTO This causes the sequence to jump to a specified
ated, CH1 V/DIV will be entered into the sequence. The only sequence step. This can be used to set up a continuous
mass storage functions that can be used in a sequence are the sequence that returns to the start from the end.
Save and Recall items from the Save and Recall menus.
IF … GOTO A conditional jump can be added to a sequence.
Selecting any other mass storage function results in the error
If the parameters specified are true, the sequence continues
message ENTRY NOT ALLOWED IN SEQUENCE While
from the specified step number, otherwise it continues with
learning a sequence, pressing either Save or Recall does not
the next sequential step. The parameters refer to previous
result in a save or recall being performed.
measurements and are >, <, <=, >=, and <>.
Rename To rename a sequence, press button [5] to get the
INSERT AUTOPLOT When this step is reached while
Sequence Name pad from which an eight character name
running a sequence, a single shot acquisition is performed
may be entered.
which is then plotted. The plot uses the parameters set in the
Delete To delete an item form the sequence, press button plot configuration menu. Selecting this command actually
[6] and the highlighted item is deleted. All subsequent steps puts four steps into the sequence: “Start Autoplot”, SINGLE
move up one place. SHOT, PLOT, and “End Autoplot”.
More While editing or learning a sequence, some extra
functions are available by pressing button [8] to obtain the
list of “More” functions.
65
INSERT AUTOSAVE When this step is reached while RECALL This adds a step into the sequence which causes
running a sequence, a single shot acquisition is performed a recall operation to be performed using the current recall
which is then saved. The save operation uses the parameters setup set in the save/recall menu.
set in the save menu, and is a trace, sequence or setup.
SAVE This adds a step into the sequence which causes a
Selecting this command actually puts four steps into the
save operation to be performed using the current save setup
sequence: “Start Autosave”, SINGLE SHOT, SAVE
set in the save/recall menu. This has the same effect as
TRACES, and “End Autosave”.
pressing the front panel save button
INSERT PLOT & SAVE This command enters the follow-
UNLOCK FRONT PANEL Normally, the front panel is
ing steps into a sequence: “Start plot & save”, HOLD ALL
locked while running a sequence. It can be unlocked with
ON, PLOT, SAVE TRACES, HOLD ALL OFF and “End
this function.
plot and save”.
WAIT FOR INPUT SIGNAL A sequence can be paused to
3 When these steps are reached, the current display is printed
await an external TTL signal. The signal should be con-
and a save operation is performed, using the parameters set
nected to pin 3 of the miscellaneous I/O connector on the rear
in the Plot Configuration and Save menus.
panel. This signal may typically come from a foot switch and
MESSAGE A message may inserted into a sequence so that requires a high to a low transition to occur. The input must
when the step is reached, the message is displayed on the remain low for at least 100 ms for an input to be registered.
screen. The text for the message, which can be up to 18
WAIT ON SOFT KEY A sequence can be paused to await
characters long, is entered using the Message Entry pad
a press of any one of the cursor buttons. This can be used in
obtained by pressing button [5].
conjunction with the Message and Beep commands to prompt
LOCK FRONT PANEL All controls with the exception of you to complete an action.
the Cancel button (5) can be made inactive by locking the
WAIT ON TRIGGER A sequence can be paused to await
front panel.
the next valid trigger.
OUTPUT SIGNAL While a sequence is running, a TTL
WAIT UNTIL CONTINUE When a sequence is run and
level signal can be generated by the instrument at a particular
reaches this command, the sequence stops and displays
point in the sequence. This signal appears on pin 4 of the
CONTINUE beside button [3] on the screen. When you
miscellaneous I/O connector on the rear panel and is a
press button [3] , the sequence continues. A possible use for
positive going pulse between 10 ms and 50 ms long.
this feature may be to stop a sequence to allow probes to be
PAUSE HH:MM:SS If it is required to introduce a pause changed or repositioned.
into a sequence, choose this function. A pause time can then
WAIT UNTIL STORED When a sequence is run and
be entered using the time entry pad obtained by pressing
reaches this command, the sequence stops and waits until the
button [5]. The time can be from 1 second to 99 hours 59
current acquisition is complete and stored before it contin-
minutes and 59 seconds. When the sequence is run and this
ues.
step reached, the instrument will pause for the specified
time.
PLOT Selecting Plot adds a plot command into the sequence
without actually causing a plot to happen, thus saving paper.
The front panel Plot/Save button is disabled during learn or
edit, and a plot command is NOT added to the sequence if it
is pressed. When this command is reached during a se-
quence, a plot of the current display occurs using the plot
parameters from the Plot Configuration menu.
PRINT This adds a step into the sequence which causes a
one line measurement result to be printed on the plotter.
66
3.10 Trace Analysis Menu 3.10.1 Analysis Functions Menu

To set trace analysis or to display an input channel, the The type of analysis is selected from this menu.
15 Analysis menu is used. This is obtained by a second press of
the Trace On/Off button (35) or from the Main menu. ANALYSIS FUNCTIONS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select
. . . 1
20 Note: The functions available from this menu are for the
DISPLAY
Integra 15, 20, 40 and 60 only, with the exception of . . . . . . .
FILTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
40 the Display function. INTEGRATE
. . . . . . .
DIFFERENTIATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
TRACE ANALYSIS INVERT
60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hold
. . 1 +. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cancel
. . . 4
–
Status X. . . . . . .
. . . . .DISPLAY
. . . CH1
. . . . .LIVE
. . . . . . . 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
TRC1 / 3
TRC2 DISPLAY CH2 LIVE GRAPH
. .
TRC3 . . .DISPLAY
. . . CH3
. . . . .LIVE
. . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
HISTOGRAM
TRC4 DISPLAY CH4 LIVE FFT
TRC5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Change
. . . 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
TRC6
TRC7
. . . . .TRC1
. . +. TRC2
. . . . .HELD
. . . . Delete
. . . 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
TRC8 TRC1 X TRC1 HELD
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Defaults
. . . 6 Figure 3.10.1 Analysis Functions Menu
. . . x0.1
SCALE: . . x0.2
. . x0.5
. . x1.0
. . . . . . . . . . . 7 Select To select an analysis function, scroll through the
analysis functions list using buttons [2] and [3], then press
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 button [1] and the display changes to the Source Trace menu.
Functions
Figure 3.10 A Typical Trace Analysis Menu
Filter The trace or channel can be filtered by a simple low
When performing any waveform processing that modifies a pass filter and the 3 dB point displayed on the trace display.
displayed trace, the new data could be overwritten almost
immediately by a fresh acquisition unless the selected trace The frequency of the filter applied to the waveform is
is held or further acquisitions are prevented (e.g. the instru- selected from the Analysis Status menu after the source trace
ment is in single shot mode and the trace stored). If the entry is complete. This function is available on the Integra 20
instrument is not in this state, the processing will be shown with the advanced analysis option only.
as LIVE. Integrate The display shows the integrated waveform of the
Trace manipulations are with respect to the voltage refer- selected trace or channel. The voltage reference is taken as
ence line. zero for integration and the cursor reads out the value of the
area under the original curve between the time reference and
To stop the highlighted analysis function, press HOLD 1 in the cursor in Vs – volt–seconds – or similar units.
this menu.
To allow an integrated waveform to fit on the screen, a
To change the content of a trace, select it using buttons [2] scaling factor can be applied to the integrated function using
and [3] and press button [4], Change. The Analysis Func- button [8] in the Trace Analysis menu. This function is
tions menu is then displayed. Note that traces 1 to 4 only can available on the Integra 20 with the advanced analysis option
display their respective input channels. The channel signal only.
can be simply displayed or it can be filtered, integrated,
differentiated, or inverted. Differentiate The display shows the differentiated wave-
form of the selected trace or channel. The voltage reference
is taken as zero for differentiation.
To allow a differentiated waveform to fit on the screen, a
scaling factor can be applied to the differentiated function
using button [8] in the Trace Analysis menu. This function
is available on the Integra 20 with the advanced analysis
option only.
67
Invert The selected trace or channel will be inverted about 3.10.2 Source Trace Menu
the voltage reference. Any cursor measurements will be
Once an analysis function has been chosen, the display
made on the inverted waveform.
changes to the Source Trace menu.
+ The selected traces or channels are added together. Each
point on the resultant trace is the sum of the voltages from the SOURCE TRACE
equivalent points on the two source traces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select
. . . 1
– The second trace is subtracted from the first trace. . . FILTER

TRC4 . . . .CH4
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
× The selected traces are multiplied. To allow a multiplied TRC1
. . . . .INTEGRATE
. . . . . CH1
. . . . . . . . . . 3
waveform to fit on the screen, a scaling factor can be applied TRC2 INVERT CH2
to the multiply function using button [8] in the Analysis TRC3 DISPLAY CH3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cancel
. . . 4
Status menu. TRC4 FILTER CH4
3 TRC5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
/ The first selected trace or channel is divided by the second TRC6
trace or channel. To allow a divided waveform to fit on the TRC7
. .
TRC8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
screen, a scaling factor can be applied to the multiply
CH1
function using button [8] in the Analysis Status menu. . .
CH2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
CH3
Graph Graphing produces a trace of a selected measure-
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
ment result so you can see how a measurement value varies
over time. The graph parameters are set using the Graph
Parameter menu which is obtained by pressing button [8] Figure 3.10.2 Source Trace Menu
from the Analysis Status menu. See Section 3.10.4. This
Select the required source trace using this menu by high-
function is available on the Integra 20 with the advanced
lighting the required trace using buttons [2] and [3].
analysis option only.
Select To confirm that the trace selected with buttons [2]
Histogram Histograms show the spread of a measurement
and [3] is the required source trace, press button [1].
result with like values being placed into bins to build up a
histogram of the measurement. The histogram parameters For some analysis functions such as add, a second source
are set using the Histogram Parameter menu which is ob- trace is required. For these functions the Source Trace menu
tained by pressing button [8] from the Analysis Status menu. remains displayed after the select button has been pressed
See Section 3.10.5. This function is available on the Integra but the highlight in line 2 will move to the second source
20 with the advanced analysis option only. trace, allowing the user to select the required second source
from the list, again using buttons [2] and [3].
FFT A Fast Fourier Transfer (FFT) is performed on the
selected trace or channel. Various parameters for the calcu- If a destination trace is also required, the display changes to
lation can be set from the FFT parameters menu. See Section the Destination Trace menu, which is similar to the Source
3.10.3. This function is available on the Integra 20 with the Trace menu, except that the destination trace is to be chosen.
advanced analysis option only. Pressing Select from the Destination Trace menu causes the
display to change to the Analysis Status menu.
Scale When Integrate, Differentiate, Divide or Multiply is
selected as the operation, the scale line next to button [8] on
the Trace Analysis menu appears, so that a scale factor can
be applied to the calculation result to allow it to fit on the
screen. Pressing button [8] steps around the available fac-
tors. For Integrate, Divide and Multiply, the factors are ×0.1,
×0.2, ×0.5 and ×1.0. For Differentiate the factors are ×0.5,
×1.0, ×2.0, ×5.0, ×10, ×20 and ×50.
68
Filter Frequency If a filter operation is shown and high- 3.10.3 FFT Parameters Menu
lighted, the frequency of the 3 dB point of the simple low
This menu controls the variable parameters associated with
pass filter is shown on line 8.
an FFT analysis. A windowing function can be selected, and
The frequency of the filter applied to the waveform is linear or log scales selected for the horizontal (frequency)
selected using button [8]. and vertical axes.
One of six filter stages can be chosen from the scrolled list. FFT PARAMETERS
The actual frequencies available depend on the timebase at . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Return
. . . 1
which the selected trace was acquired and is determined by
the following equation: . . . HANNING
Window: . . . . . RECTANGLE
. . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Ff . . . . Scale:
Horizontal . . .LOG
. . LINEAR
. . . . . . . . . . . 3
Hz
Timebase
3
. . .Scale:
Vertical . . .LOG
. . LINEAR
. . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Where:
. Log
Vert . . Scale
. . Mode:
. . . AUTO
. . . FIXED
. . . . . . . . . 5
Ff is one of 5.44, 2.46, 1.15, 0.547, 0.261, 0.124
Timebase is in seconds per division . . . 256
Points: . .512
. .1024
. . 2048
. . 4096
. . . . . . . . . 6
For example, for a timebase of 2 ms/div, the first filter . region

Set . . . (in. Main)
. . with
. . Ref
. .< .> . . . . . . . . 7
frequency will be:
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
5.44
2e–3 = 2.72 kHz
Figure 3.10.3 FFT Parameters Menu
If external timebase is selected, the filter factors on line 8
Window Either a rectangular or Hanning type FFT window
simply become a number between 1 and 6.
can be selected by pressing button [2] to select the required
Defaults Pressing button [7] returns the Trace displays to type.
the instrument’s default setting of Traces 1 to 4 displaying
Horizontal Scale The horizontal scale of the FFT can be
Channels 1 to 4 respectively.
set to either Linear or Logarithmic using button [3].
Vertical Scale The vertical scale of the FFT can be set to
either Linear or Logarithmic using button [4].
Points The number of FFT points can be set using button
[6]. The portion of the trace to which the points will apply
can be set using the reference paddle. The bar within the box
at the bottom of the screen moves to show approximately
which part of the trace will be used.
69
3.10.4 Graph Parameters Menu Measurement This line displays the measurement that
will be graphed, taken from the calculations in the Measure-
Graphing produces a trace of a selected measurement result
ment Functions menu.
so it may be seen how a measurement value varies over time.
Update Rate This line is used to set the update rate for
GRAPH PARAMETERS MENU graphing. This is the rate at which measurement values are
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Return
. . . 1 added to the results graph. This means that the X axis will be
time related. The rate can vary from full acquisition rate –
. . . . . .M01
Measurement: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
ACQ (i.e. one measurement added per acquisition, where
. . .Rate:
. . 0.5s
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
results will be duplicated) through to 100 seconds. The full
Update
list of possible values is ACQ, 1 s, 2 s, 5 s, 10 s, 20 s, 50 s and
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 100 s.
3 . . . .Reading:
Maximum . . . +200.E+00
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
This will give an X axis scaling of 500 seconds full scale at
1 second to 50,000 seconds full scale at 100 seconds.
. . . Reading:
Minimum . . . . -100.E+00
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Maximum Reading Button [5] is used to enter the value
of the measurement corresponding to the top of the screen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 using the Graph Max Reading entry pad. The maximum
allowed value is ±1E±30.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Minimum Reading Button [6] is used to enter the value of
Figure 3.10.4 Graph Parameters Menu the measurement corresponding to the bottom of the screen.
The minimum allowed value is ±1E±30.
Note: Once graphing is in progress, the cursor and vertical
reference lines become locked. It is not possible to
move them until the graphing function has been
stopped. The function is stopped by means of the
Hold button [1] which appears in the Trace Analysis
menu when graphing is in progress.
The resultant trace produced by the graphing process
cannot be treated as a normal acquisition trace
because its horizontal and vertical scalings are
different.
Result graphs will only work in refresh mode. If roll
mode is selected when a graph is being produced it
will stop being updated.
If the volts time measurement is done on a result
graph trace, the following results are produced: in
absolute mode the voltage reading gives the value of
the selected measurement at that point and the time
reading will give the time in seconds of the reading
with the start of the graph being taken as zero time.
In delta mode the references are used to define the
zero points for the readings.
Any attempt to change any of the following parameters
while graphing is in progress will result in the
message LOCKED WHEN GRAPH RUNNING being
displayed. To change a parameter, first stop graphing.
70
3.10.5 Histogram Parameters Menu If the volts–time measurement is done on a histogram

trace, the voltage reading will give the number of
Histograms show the spread of a measurement result with
occurrences of the selected bin and the time reading
like values being placed into bins to build up a histogram of
will give the measurement range for the selected bin.
the measurement.
Any attempt to change any of the following parameters
HISTOGRAM PARAMETERS MENU while graphing is in progress will result in the
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Return
. . . 1 message LOCKED WHEN HISTOGRAM RUNNING
being displayed. To change a parameter, first stop
. . . . . .M01
Measurement: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
histograms.
. . .Rate:
Update . . 0.5s
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Measurement This line displays the measurement to pro-
duce a histogram, taken from the calculations in the Mea-
. . . . Range:
. . . MANUAL
. . . . AUTO
. . . . . . . . . 4
Horizontal surement Functions menu. 3
. . . .Reading:
Maximum . . . +200.E+00
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Update Rate This item is used to set the update rate for
histograms. This is the rate at which measurement values are
. . . Reading:
Minimum . . . . -100.E+00
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 added to the histogram. The rate can vary from full acquisi-
tion rate – ACQ (i.e. one measurement added per acquisi-
. . 10
Bins: . 20
. . 50. 100
. . 250
. . 500
. . . . . . . . . . 7 tion, where results will be duplicated) through to 100 sec-
onds. The full list of possible values is ACQ, 1 s, 2 s, 5 s, 10 s,
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
20 s, 50 s and 100 s.
Figure 3.10.5 Histogram Parameters Menu Horizontal Range Vertical scaling is automatic and is
arranged such that the histogram will always use as much of
Note: While the instrument is producing histograms, the the height of the display as possible. The horizontal scaling,
cursor and vertical reference lines are locked. It is however, can be set to be either automatic or manual using
not possible to move them or change the selected button [4].
cursor trace until the histogram function has been
In automatic mode, the number of bins start at the number set
stopped. The function is stopped by means of the
in line 7, but if more are required, the quantity automatically
Hold button [1] that appears in the Trace Analysis
increases to the next available number, up to a maximum of
menu when histograms are in progress.
500.
The resultant trace produced by the histogram
In manual mode, the number of bins is as set in line 7 and if
function cannot be treated as a normal acquisition
more are required an underflow and overflow bin are cre-
trace because its horizontal and vertical scalings are
ated.
different.
Maximum Reading Button [5], Maximum Reading, is
Histograms operate in the same way as Graph results
used to enter the value of the measurement corresponding to
except that the display is accumulated up the screen.
the right-hand side of the screen. The maximum allowed
This produces a histogram of measurement value
value is ±1E±30.
along the X axis against number of occurrences on
the Y axis. Minimum Reading Button [6], Minimum Reading, is
used to enter the value of the measurement corresponding to
When a measurement reading is taken it will be
the left-hand side of the screen. The minimum allowed value
placed into the appropriate bin if it lies within the
is ±1E±30.
minimum and maximum readings, otherwise it will
be discarded. The bin into which it is placed is be Bins Button [7], Bins, is used to set the number of bins into
calculated from the range (the maximum reading which the measurement results are put. The selection rolls
minus the minimum reading) and the number of bins. round the following set of values; 10, 20, 50, 100, 250
and 500.
71
3.11 Save/Recall Menu FILE OPTIONS

Traces, sequences and instrument setups can be saved and . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Return
. . . 1
recalled to any of the installed storage media using the Save/ FLOPPY DISK
. . DISK
HARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Recall menu.
DEFAULT
RAM
. .DISK
. .45k
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
SAVE/RECALL RAM DISK 1Mb
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Options
. . . 1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . Open
. . User
. . Folder
. . . 4
FLOPPY DISK
. . DISK
HARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rename
. . . . 5
RAM DISK 45k
RAM
. .DISK
. .1Mb
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete
. . . 6
3 . . . . . . . . . . . . Open
. . Device
. . . Folder
. . . 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Copy
. . To. 7
. . . . . . . . . . . . . New
. . User
. . Folder
. . . 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Recall Default Setup 9
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Figure 3.11b A Typical File Options Menu
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Various utilities are available by pressing button [1], Op-
tions. The menu changes as shown in the typical example in
Figure 3.11a Basic Save/Recall Menu Figure 3.11b.
The folder (or directory) structure of the storage devices is To rename the selected item, press button [5] and enter the
shown on the left-hand side of the Save/Recall Menu. This new name on the entry pad that is displayed. This is useful
structure can be expanded and contracted as desired so that to rename the trace folder, which is initially called Un-
the particular storage area is clearly shown, together with the named, so that a number of different trace folders can be
contents of that area. created each storing traces from for example different tests.
To expand a folder, move the highlight using buttons [2] and To delete the selected item simply press button [6]. A second
[3] and press button [4] which is labeled Open Folder. press is then required to confirm that the selected item is to
To contract a folder, move the highlight onto an opened be deleted.
folder and press button [4], which will now be labeled Close To copy the selected item, press button [7] and then select the
Folder. destination device using buttons [2] and [3]. The title of the
To create a new user, press button [5] and insert the new menu changes to show that a copy operation is in progress
name from the displayed entry pad. When the name is and the source is shown at the top of the menu. The destina-
correct, press button [1], Done, and a new user folder will be tion can be the same or a different device. Once the required
created together with three sub folders called Sequence, destination has been selected, press button [1], Copy.
Setups and Unnamed. If required, the copy can be saved with a different name by
To save a trace, sequence or setup, the required storage pressing button [7] from the Copy menu, which is labeled
device must be expanded until an appropriate folder for the Copy As. The new name is entered using an alphanumeric
item in question is highlighted. When a legal location is entry pad. When the required name has been inserted, press
highlighted, button [4] will be labelled Save, or the Save button [1], Done, to start the copy process.
button (6), can be pressed to save the item. When copying, remember that trace files can only be saved
The Save button (6) can be used at any time to save using in run folders, sequences in sequence folders and setups in
the location previously set in the Save/Recall menu. If an setup folders. If an illegal destination is selected, button [1]
appropriate area is not selected, pressing the Save button (6) will not be labeled Copy.
causes the Save/Recall menu to be displayed, prompting you
to select the correct folder.
72
If a file is selected in the option menu, button [8] becomes the SAVE/RECALL
File Details option. Pressing this button changes the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Options
. . . 1
to show information about the selected file and about the FLOPPY DISK
device it is saved in. This can be used to see how much free . . DISK
HARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
space there is on the device. DEFAULT
. . SEQUENCE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
If a device is selected, the Options menu button [5] becomes (empty)
Format and button [6] becomes Optimize. . . SETUPS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
UNNAMED
Before devices can be used by the instrument to store data, 000
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
they need to formatted using the format device operation. 001
The format operation not only formats the device but also SETUP .027
. . . . TR1_200K.DAT
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
creates the default storage areas as shown in Figure 3.11b.
RAM DISK 45k
Unless the default areas are present, the instrument will be .DEFAULT
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recall
. . . 7 3
unable to complete save, recall or copy operations. SEQUENCE
. . SETUPS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recall
. . . To. 8
To format a device, select the required device from the
displayed list using buttons [2] and [3].
Figure 3.11d A Typical Save/Recall Menu –Recall Trace
When the device to be formatted is highlighted, press button
[1]. A message asking for confirmation that the device is to In the menu shown above (Figure 3.11d), it can be seen that
be formatted appears. Press button [1] again to confirm the Trace 1 has been selected from run number 001 and, if button
action or press any other key to avoid formatting the selected [7] is pressed, it will be recalled as Trace 1. To recall it to a
device. different trace, press button [8] and select the destination
trace from the displayed list. Finally, to actually recall the
WARNING Once a device has been formatted, any trace, press button [1].
information that was previously stored on
it will be lost forever. To recall just a trace or a setup, select the item as described
above.
SAVE/RECALL To recall all traces and the setup at the same time, select the
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Options
. . . 1 folder in which the required files are save and press button
FLOPPY DISK [6] which is labeled Recall Traces and Setup.
. . DISK
HARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
DEFAULT
. . SEQUENCE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3.11.1 Storage Devices
(empty)
. . SETUPS
. . . . . . . . . Close
. . Sequence
. . . . Folder
. . . 4 The instrument is fitted with an internal 45 kByte RAM disk
UNNAMED as standard equipment. The Integra 10 can have one addi-
RAM DISK 45k tional floppy disk drive as optional equipment. The Integra
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
DEFAULT
SEQUENCE
20, 40 and 60 can have an internal 1 Mbyte RAM disk, a
. . SETUPS
. . . . . . . . . . .Save
. .Sequence
. . . .As. 6 floppy disk drive and a 500 Mbyte hard disk drive as optional
UNNAMED equipment.
. .DISK
RAM . .1Mb
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
DEFAULT The standard internal RAM disk is a 45 kByte battery backed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 memory.
Figure 3.11c A Typical Expanded Save/Recall Menu

The menu shown above has had several folders opened and
it can be seen that there are no sequences stored in the default
user’s sequence directory.
73
Traces, sequences and setups can only be saved in their own

CAUTION: The battery for the RAM disk is guaranteed
to maintain the memory for one month,
folders.
without power connected to the instrument, The names shown are the default names provided by the
assuming that the battery was initially fully instrument. The items shown in upper case are fixed and
charged. Beyond this period, data may be cannot be changed but all other items can be named or
lost if the battery power becomes too low.
renamed by the user.
If the battery power does fall too low, RAM
corruption will occur and, when the The first time a device is used, most users will want to
instrument is next switched on, the specify the names to be used for the storage areas but
instrument will perform a System Reset thereafter it is simply necessary to press the Save button (6)
and reformat the RAM disk.
to save the selected items in the required storage areas.
To avoid loss of data, it is therefore
3 recommended that either valuable data is
3.11.1.1 File names
stored on floppy disk or the instrument is
periodically switched on for at least 2 hours Trace files are saved in the Unnamed area with the standard
to ensure that the battery is regularly Nicolet extension (the three characters after the period ‘.’)
recharged. .WFT so that the trace data can be recognized by ProView,
a PC program from Nicolet for complete display, analysis
The floppy disk drive is a 3.5" high density, 1.44 MByte
and custom report generation of data. WFT binary files can
industry standard MSDOS format drive, enabling data to be
be converted to ASC values using the conversion programs
transferred to a PC for further processing or storage.
on the enclosed Nicolet PC Utility disk.
All storage devices are used in the same way and have the
The first eight characters of the trace file name describe the
same memory and file structure as shown in Figure 3.11.1.
trace name and the data length, e.g. TR3_50K.WFT would
User
be the name for a trace file of a 50 K trace from trace 3. The
50K part changes to 200k for a 200,000 point trace, 10K for
a 10,000 point trace, 5K0 for a 5,000 point trace and 500 for
a 500 point trace.
Unnamed SETUPS SEQUENCE If you do not specify a run name, the storage area will be
called UNNAMED.
000 SETUP.027 sequence.DSQ Setup files are saved with a user specified name with a
maximum of eight characters and a numerical extension
027. If a name is not specified, the Setup will be saved as
TR1_200K.DAT UNNAMED.027.
Graph, Histogram and FFT files are each saved in their
Figure 3.11.1 Memory File Structure own format in the form ANA_TR1.XXX.
The boxes with round corners represent storage areas (fold- ANA shows that the trace is an ANAlysis trace and TR1 is
ers) for each kind of data file and the square cornered boxes the trace name from which the trace originates. This can be
represent the actual data files. from TR1 to TR8.
The Save/Recall menus are used to save and recall traces or Graphs are saved with the extension .GRH
setups from or to the instrument. To copy previously saved Histograms are saved with the extension .HST and
information between storage devices, the Copy command is FFTs are saved with the extension .FFT.
used. The Copy command is selected from the Save/Recall
options menu.
Up to 100 users can be created and named on each storage
device so that individuals can save and recall their own
information in their own area.
Any combination of traces, sequences and setups can be
saved on any storage device so long as there is space
available.
74
3.11.2 Direct Recording to Hard Disk To set up a recording (same function as seen within the
Utility menu), use button [9] from the Save/Recall menu
This function enables direct real time recording to the hard
15 disk (Integra 15 and Integra 20 only) using the Save/Recall with selection UNNAMED highlighted to display the Re-
corder menu. This menu is used to set the event markers and
menu shown in Figure 3.11.2.
the recording duration for both the direct recording to
20 internal hard disk and direct recording to internal thermal
SAVE/RECALL
. . . DISK
FLOPPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Options
. . . 1 plotter modes.
HARD DISK
DEFAULT
. SEQUENCE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 RECORDER MENU
SETUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Return
. . . 1
UNNAMED
. . 001
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
002 . . .Event
Display . . Markers:
. . . . OFF
. . ON
. . . . . . . . . 2
003
. . 004
. . . . . . . . .Close
. . Run
. .Name
. . Folder
. . . 4
005 . . Marker
Event . . . A:'MarkerA'
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3
006
. . 007
. . . . . . . . . . .Save
. .Traces/Setup
. . . . . 5
008 . . Marker
. . . B:'MarkerB'
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
009 Event
. . . MARKERS
. . . . .
REC1
.MRK
. . . . . . . . . . . .
.DAT Save Traces/Setup As 6
REC2 .DAT . . Marker
Event . . . C:'MarkerC'
. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . 5
. . . REC3
. . . . .
REC4
.DAT
. . . . . . Start
.DAT . . Recording
. . . . 7
RAM DISK 45k (Next Run: 010) . . Maximum
Show . . . . Record
. . . Duration
. . . . . . . . . . . 6
. . . . . . . . . . . . .Start
. .Recording
. . . .As. 8
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Setup Recording 9 HHH:MM:SS
. . .Duration:
Record . . . 0. 0 .0 : .0 0.: 1.2 . . . . . . . . . 8
Figure 3.11.2 Save/Recall Menu for Direct Recording
Note: The Direct Recording function is only available Figure 3.11.2b Recorder Menu
when the Roll mode is selected in the Display menu.
DISPLAY MENU
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status
. . . 1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Display
. . . Type:
. . .YT. XY
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Display
. . . Mode:
. . . REFRESH
. . . . .ROLL
. . . . . . . . . 4
Trace
. . Dot
. . Join:
. . OFF
. . .ON. . . . . . . . . . . 5
Display
. . . Max/Min:
. . . . OFF
. . ON
. . . . . . . . . . . 6
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Figure 3.11.2a Display Menu With Roll Mode Selected

Maximum direct recording to hard disk acquisition
rates:
20kS/s or 50µs per point on four channels/traces simultaneously
50kS/s or 20µs per point on four channels/traces simultaneously
100kS/s or 10µs per point on one channel/trace
These values can vary depending on the sweep length setting
used.
75
Event markers can be toggled on or off using button [2]. Pressing button [8] in the Recorder menu displays the
Each event marker A through C can have a custom name up Record Duration entry pad, from which the hours, minutes
to nineteen characters long. Using buttons [3], [4], or [5] and seconds (HHHMMSS) can be entered (see Figure
cause the Event Marker entry pad to be displayed, where you 3.11.2d).
can choose from the entire set of characters and numbers.
RECORD DURATION
EVENT MARKER TEXT Done 1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Done
. . 1 Ref (<--> ) moves selection.
Ref (<--> ) moves selection. 0123456789_∞ Inc 2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123456789_Sp Dec 3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Cancel 4
3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cancel
. . . 4
Clear 5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Clear
. . 5
Delete 6
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete
. . . 6
HHHMMSS 7
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Cursor (<-->) moves entry point.
0000012 Insert 8
Cursor (<-->) moves entry point.
THIS
. IS
. .EVENT
. . .MARKA
. . . . . . . . . . . .Insert
. . 8
Figure 3.11.2d Record Duration Menu
Figure 3.11.2c Event Marker Text Menu
A direct to disk recording can ONLY be started as
Pressing button [6] in the Recorder menu displays the follows:
maximum record duration based on the current acquisition
First, place the highlighted selector on UNNAMED, as
settings.
shown in Figure 3.11.2. Return to the waveform display,
press the Live button (19), then the Save button (6). The
system indicates on the display (via text) when it is ready to
record. The system prompts you to press the Save button (6)
to start recording.
A recording can be cancelled at any time by pressing the
Cancel button (5) on the front panel.
While a recording is underway, a set of three separate
markers can be generated at any time, and as many times as
needed during the recording. The screen displays text during
the recording to indicate that buttons [2], [3], and [4]
correspond to Markers A, B, and C respectively. This
enables easy identification of important events during replay
of the recording.
76
A direct to disk recording can be replayed on the display as Button [1] toggles between play and pause modes.
long as the pointer is left on the file run number to be
Button [2] fast forwards the recording.
replayed.
Button [3] rewinds the recording.
SAVE/RECALL
FLOPPY DISK
Button [4] steps the replay speed to a slower rate, which is
Options 1
HARD DISK displayed at the top of the screen as X1, X2, etc.
DEFAULT
SEQUENCE 2
SETUPS Button [5] steps the replay speed to a faster rate, which is
UNNAMED displayed at the top of the screen as X1, X2, etc.
001 3
002
003 Button [6] displays a set of options for stepping to the next
004 Close Run No. Folder 4 or previous Marker A, B, or C and allows you to set the three
005
006 marker numbers.
007
008 5 3
009 Button [7] stops the replay mode and returns to the Save/
MARKERS .MRK Recall Traces Only Recall screen.
REC1 .DAT 6
REC2 .DAT
REC3 .DAT
Recall Traces/Setup
The replay screen also provides information on the display,
REC4 .DAT 7
RAM DISK 45k such as:
Start Replay 8 Position This is a value in time.
Screen Number This is a screen width number based on the
Figure 3.11.2e Save/Recall Menu
current sweep length setting, therefore more or less data can
Replaying Recording Files be reviewed depending on the current sweep length setting
used during replay.
First press button [8] to enable the Start Replay function. The
system begins recalling the data to disk, followed by the Replay Speed During replay, this displays X1, X2, etc. and
replaying of the signals. While the waveforms replay, a can be changed using the slower and faster buttons described
variety of options are displayed (overlayed) on the screen to previously.
change the replay mode.
Recorded Timebase This is the setting used when the
recording was made.
REPLAY CONTROL MENU
Speed: X4 1 Start Time This is the time the recording was started.
Pos: 0:00:02.044 Screen: 2/2
2 Duration This is the length of the entire recording.
(Cursor ) A fill bar at the top of the display shows where the current
3 replay screen is within the entire recording.
Slower 4 Cursor measurements can be made on the replay data by
pressing the Menu On/Off button (39) and then displaying
Faster 5 the cursor measurements using the Select Trace button (9).
GoTo 6 To create a chart recorder plot of the data, press the Plot
button (8) while in the Replay screen.
Stop 7
Recorded timebase: 200 ms/DIV
Start time: 16:31:46 Duration: 0:00:03 8
Figure 3.11.2f Replay Control Menu
77
3.12 YT Measurements. 3.12.1 Measurement Parameters

YT Measurements allow some very powerful measurements Each measurement has a specific set of parameters, some of
to be used. Measurements can be assigned to various wave- which are unique to that particular measurement, and some
form points (for example the max of a waveform). The of which are drawn from a standard set of parameters. The
custom measurements option (Integra 15, 20, 40 and 60 standard parameters are described here and the unique
only) can take these individual results and combine them by parameters are described under the appropriate measure-
using simple arithmetic operators in several stages to pro- ment heading.
vide results to complex calculations.
Waveform points are definable on different channels so that 3.12.2 Standard Parameters
measurements can be made on more than one channel at
Trace The Trace (TRC1 to TRC8 or whichever trace the
once.
cursor is sitting on) on which the measurement is to be
3 The top and base levels, for use in such measurements as performed.
risetime, amplitude and overshoot, can be automatically
Bounds The horizontal extent over which a trace is mea-
calculated as defined by IEEE standard 181–1977 or can be
sured; can be either between cursors (the time reference and
defined by the reference and cursor positions.
the cursor) or the full trace or between the two previous
For pulse transitions, a particular transition number can be crossing type measurements. These can be Max/min, Trig-
selected. ger, Rising/Falling Crossing or Knee.
Customized measurement results (Integra 15, 20, 40 and 60 Top/Base The method of determining the top and base
15 option only) based on arithmetic combinations of previous levels of a trace; can be either the IEEE standard statistical
results, such as difference in time or voltage, or ratio of method (IEEE std 181-1977) or simply the values of the
20 voltage/time or time/voltage can be created. Custom mea- trace where the horizontal positions of the time reference
surements can also have a scaling factor and an offset and the cursor.
40 applied and each measurement can have its units specified
and be given a unique name.
60
∆t
∆m
PT
PB
(a) (b)
Figure 3.12.2 Top/Base Statistical Analysis
78
The basic principle of the statistical method of analysis Scaling Off/On For measurement operators, a scaling fac-
achieved as described in IEEE 181–1977, the IEEE Standard tor, offset and annotation can be applied to the result. This
on Pulse Measurement and Analysis by Objective Tech- parameter is used to turn the scaling factor off and on.
niques, is also described here:
Scaling For measurement operators, a floating point scaling
Assume a pulse waveform such as that shown below in factor can be applied to the result. This parameter is used to
Figure 3.12.2a has a grid superimposed on it where the specify the scaling factor.
dimensions Dt and Dm are equivalent to the sample times
Offset For measurement operators, a floating point offset
and the instrument’s ADC levels. An occurrence histogram
can be applied to the result. The offset is applied before any
(Figure 3.12.2b) is then produced for each ADC level (Dm)
scaling so that the offset is in the same units as the measure-
through which the waveform passes.
ment. This parameter is used to specify the offset level.
From this histogram, the two peaks corresponding with the
Scaling Annotation For measurement operators, a scaling
top and the base of the waveform PT and PB can be identified.
annotation can be applied, to represent user defined units, to 3
The means of the PT and PB are calculated and taken to be the the result. The annotation is specified with this parameter.
Top and Base levels respectively.
Name This is used to specify the name associated with a
This analysis is best suited to pulse waveforms with bases particular measurement.
and tops of significant relative duration.
Markers Allows a measurement to have a set of markers (a
Some waveforms such as a triangular wave do not produce pair of dotted horizontal “reference lines”) to be associated
a suitable histogram with two peaks so the maximum and with a particular measurement. They can be used to indicate
minimum of the waveform are used. You can choose to the top and base, max, min, crossing etc. Only one set of
define the levels using the cursor and reference lines. markers are available and are “owned” by a particular
measurement.
Crossing Defines the method of specifying crossing level
for a trace; this can be either where the trace intersects the Reference Specifies if voltages are displayed referenced to
voltage reference, where it intersects the ground level, or the channel ground or to the time (horizontal) reference line.
where it intersects a certain percentage of the top and base. See Section 3.12.3. The Reference can also be used as a
Depending upon the crossing level selected, the voltage will measurement result.
be either an absolute or a delta value. Crossing can also be
Reference Locked to Trace In XY measurements, this
a measurement. When using ground or percent of top and
allows the horizontal and vertical reference lines to be
base, an Absolute value is obtained and, when using the
locked to a trace.
voltage reference, a delta value is obtained.
Display Area Fill This selects whether the area measured in
Crossing Level If the crossing is set to be a percentage of top
the XY area measurement is displayed on the screen as a
and base, then this defines the percentage value of that
filled area.
crossing.
Reset In the Average measurement, this allows the accumu-
Transition No. This defines the transition number to be
lating value to be reset to the current measurement value.
measured. The transition level is set by either Left/Right
transition or Low/High transition.
Left/Right Transition For pulse width measurements, this
specifies the left and right transition level in terms of a
percentage of the top and base levels.
Low/High Transition For risetime measurements, this speci-
fies the low and high transition levels in terms of a percent-
age of the top and base levels.
79
3.12.3 Measurement Modes 3.12.5 Measurement Resolution (Time).

These are set individually for each measurement and are Resolution, the number of digits displayed for measurement
selected by changing the “REFERENCE” parameter to results, is as follows:
either “GROUND” or “REFERENCE”.
Time Results:
The exception to this is the “CROSSING” measurement
which uses the “CROSSING” parameter. “GROUND” or Memory Digits
Length Displayed
“% OF TOP-BASE” gives an absolute measurement while
“REFERENCE” gives a delta measurement. 500 3
Ground Voltage measurements are made with respect to the 5000 4
ground for a channel, i.e. an absolute value. 10000 5
3 Reference Voltage measurements are made with respect to 50000 5
the voltage reference line, i.e. a delta value. 200000 6
In either case time measurements are made with respect to
the time reference line.
3.12.6 Measurement Units
XY CURSOR MODES
When measurements are performed on traces that have been
Ground Mode with Reference Locked to Trace The acquired using an external timebase, the horizontal results
horizontal and vertical reference lines are fixed to the trigger will be in Samples and not a specific time. Measurements on
point; voltage and time measurements are made with respect analysis traces, such as differentiated or integrated, are
to this. If the trigger point is off screen, for example if trigger presented in suitable units.
delay is on, the voltage measurement will use the value on
the left hand edge of the screen.
3.12.7 Using Measurements
Reference Mode with Reference Locked to Trace The
voltage reference line is fixed to where the time reference To use the measurements, a sequence of the required mea-
line crosses the trace; measurements are made with respect surements and calculations is set using the Measurement
to this point. Functions menu. This is obtained by pressing the Measure
menu button (14). A measurement is inserted into the
sequence and then the parameters for that measurement are
3.12.4 Measurements Display set. Measurements can be added to the end of the sequence,
The screen generally shows one measurement per line and inserted between existing measurements or deleted from the
displays only those which are selected On. Where a single sequence.
measurement returns two results (vertical and horizontal, for When a measurement is inserted, it is placed after the
example, MAX), these will be displayed on consecutive selected position.
lines. There are no restrictions on how many measurements
can be displayed; if there are too many to fit on the screen, Custom measurements (Integra 20, 40 and 60 only) provides
the list will scroll on the screen. an extended readout of cursor position for trace types such
as histograms and FFT traces.
MAX :TRC1 100.0 mV
The measurements can be turned off individually or as a
10.23 S whole.
CURRENT : +1.123E-03 AMPS To insert a measurement, first select the YT or the XY
The measurements display list does not overwrite the top Measurement Status menu by pressing the Measure menu
two lines of the screen; these are reserved for channel status, button (14).
timebase, zoom factor etc. Note, however, that messages,
such as pretrigger percent, or remote message overwrite the
measurements. The limits test message is considered a
measurement display line and will therefore scroll up the
screen, at the top of the list.
80
YT MEASUREMENT FUNCTIONS
Highlight the required measurement by using buttons [2]
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Off/On
. . . 1 and [3] to scroll up and down this list. When the required
measurement is highlighted, press button [1], Select, to add
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 the measurement to the sequence. The display now shows a
list of traces (or a list of existing measurements) from which
Display
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 the required source or sources for the new measurement can
M01: PK-PK =PK-PK(SEL_TR) ON be chosen by using buttons [2] and [3] to scroll to the
M02:
. .CONST
. . . . =CONST
. . . . . . . . OFF
. . . .Insert
. . 4
M05: CONST =CONST OFF required item. Having selected the source, the display changes
M03: RATIO =RATIO(M01, M02) OFF back to the measurement status menu.
. .LOG
M04: . . . . =LOG(M03)
. . . . . . . . OFF
. . .Change
. . . 5
M06: DB_REF1V=MULT(M04,M05) ON
YT MEASUREMENT FUNCTIONS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete
. . . 6
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select
. . . 1
CURSOR
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Clear
. . 7 TOP
. . . . . .
BASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
3
AMPLITUDE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters
. . . . . 8 PEAK-TO-PEAK
. . . . . .
MAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Measurements: OFF ON
MIN
Figure 3.12.7a Measurement Status Menu RISETIME
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cancel
. . . 4
FALLTIME
OVERSHOOT
From this menu press button [4], Insert, and the display PRESHOOT
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
changes to the Measurement Functions menu which is PULSE_WIDTH
FREQUENCY
simply a list of all the possible measurements. Figure 3.12.7b . . . . . .
PERIOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
shows part of the complete list of measurements. DUTY-CYCLE
RMS
. . . . . .
AC-RMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
The following are standard YT measurements for all AREA
models: TRIGGER
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
CONSTANT
• Cursor • Overshoot
• Top • Preshoot Figure 3.12.7b Measurement Functions Menu
• Base • Pulse Width
The parameters for the measurement that has just been
• Amplitude • Frequency
inserted can now be set. Press button [8], Parameters, and the
• Peak-to-Peak • Period
display changes to the Parameters menu. This menu is
• Max • Duty Cycle
similar for each measurement. The parameters for the se-
• Min • RMS
lected measurement can all be set from this menu. The
• Risetime • AC RMS
parameters and what they mean are described for each
• Falltime • Area
individual measurement in Section 3.12.
An Integra with the custom measurements option includes To set or change the parameters for any other measurement,
the following additional measurements: simply scroll through the sequence using buttons [2] and [3]
until the required measurement is highlighted and press
• Trigger • Average
15 button [8], Parameters.
• Constant • Logarithm
• Rising/Crossing • Antilog Please note that the Menu On/Off button (39) turns the
20 • Falling/Crossing • Cosine Measurements function On or Off completely. Therefore, to
• Knee • Mean turn the Menu off, press the Measure menu button (14)
• Sum • Count instead.
40
• Delta • FFT Harmonic
• Ratio • Reference
60 • Multiply • Dimensioned Constant 3.12.8 Plotting Measurements
Measurements can be plotted on the internal thermal printer,
or on an external plotter via the GPIB, RS423 or Parallel port
(see Section 3.8.4). On the internal thermal plotter, up to
fifteen lines of measurement results can be printed to the left
of the trace area.
On an external plotter, the plotted results are limited to two
columns of five lines plotted underneath the traces.
81
3.13 YT Measurements and Operators Graphs: This returns the value at the position of
15 the cursor on the graph (in whatever units the
measurement was made). The horizontal reading
3.13.1 Cursor Position 20 reflects how the graph was generated (either in
Applies to: YT traces, FFT, graphs, histograms time units or in number of acquisitions). User
40 scaling/units do not apply to this readout.
Meaning:
YT traces: This returns the cursor y position (referenced to 60
ground [default] or the horizontal reference line) and the x
position (referenced to the trigger point [default] or the Histograms: This returns the bin start and end
vertical reference line) in default units (generally volts, 15 values (in whatever units the source measurements
time) or if user scaling/units are turned on then these are were made) and the number of readings in the bin.
3 used. 20 The total number of readings may be available
To perform ∆YT cursor measurements, change the cursor from the “area” measurement. The percentage of
parameters to REF as shown in Figure 3.13.1. 40 readings in a bin may be calculated by dividing the
number of readings in a bin by the total number of
CURSOR PARAMETERS 60 readings obtained from the “area” measurement.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
. . . . .REF
Reference: . . Ground
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
. . Reference:
Time . . . . . REF
. . Trigger
. . . . . . . . . . . 3 FFT traces: This returns the voltage (in volts or
15 dBV for a log scale) and frequency of the cursor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 position, and the ratio of the cursor position to the
20 reference (harmonic). For a logarithmic vertical
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 scale, the top of graticule offset in dB is also given.
40 Absolute and relative modes are available.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 60
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Parameters: reference, name

Result: vertical, horizontal
Figure 3.13.1 Cursor Parameters Menu
3.13.2 Top/Base
Applies to: YT traces, graph
Meaning:
Statistical: When this is selected the top and base values
used will be those calculated as defined in IEEE standard
181-1977.
Cursors: When this is selected, the top base values are taken
to be the trace values at the positions of the vertical reference
line and the cursor.
Parameters: bounds, top/base, reference, name, marker -
top/base
Result: vertical
82
3.13.3 Amplitude 3.13.7 Overshoot/Preshoot

Applies to: YT traces, graph Applies to: YT traces, graph
Meaning: This returns the amplitude of the trace between Meaning: This is used to provide the overshoot and preshoot
the bounds and is top - base in default units/scaling or using of a pulse. The values are calculated on the first transition
any trace scaling/units if available. Ground/Reference modes using the following formulas:
are not relevant.
Parameters: bounds, top/base, name, marker - top/base max - top
Overshoot = × 100
top - base
Result: vertical
base -min
Preshoot = × 100
top - base
3.13.4 Peak-to-Peak
and their results are in percent. 3
Applies to: YT traces, graph
Meaning: This returns the peak to peak value of the trace Overshoot Preshoot
between the measurement bounds and is maximum value Markers: top & max
minus the minimum value in default units/scaling or using
any trace scaling/units if available. Ground/Reference modes
are not relevant.
Parameters: bounds, name, marker - max/min
Markers: base & min
Result: vertical
Preshoot Overshoot
3.13.5 Max/Min
Applies to: YT traces, graph Figure 3.12.7 Overshoot and Preshoot Measurement
Meaning: This returns the maximum or minimum of a trace Parameters: bounds, reference, name, marker - top/max or
(either absolute or delta mode) in default units (generally base/min (see Figure 3.12.7)
volts, time) or if user scaling/units are on then these will be
Result: vertical
used. Ground mode takes the ground as the vertical refer-
ence. The time reading is always in reference mode.
Parameters: bounds, reference, name, marker - max/min 3.13.8 Frequency/Period/Duty Cycle
Result: vertical, horizontal Applies to: YT traces, graph

Meaning: The period is calculated as the mean of the time
between at least three crossing points as defined by the
3.13.6 Risetime/Falltime/Pulse width
crossing parameters. Default units/scaling are used or any
Applies to: YT traces, graph trace scaling/units if available. Ground/Reference modes
Meaning: These measurements are defined as the time are not relevant.
between where the trace crosses two defined levels (two The frequency is the reciprocal of period and duty cycle is
percentages of top and base). Default units/scaling are used the ratio of mean time spent above the crossing level to the
or any trace scaling/units if available. Ground/Reference period of the waveform. The word AUTO is displayed if the
modes are not relevant. These measurements use the first trace does not cross the specified crossing level, indicating
transition found within the measurement bounds. that the 50% of the max/min range will be used instead.
Parameters: bounds, top/base, low/left transition, high/ Parameters: bounds, top/base, crossing, crossing level,
right transition, name, marker - top/base name, marker - top/base
Result: horizontal Result: horizontal
83
3.13.9 RMS/AC RMS 3.13.12 Constant

Applies to: YT traces (Not available on Integra 10)
Meaning: RMS returns the rms value of a trace (either Applies to: not applicable
absolute or delta mode) in default units (generally volts) or
Meaning: This is used to provide a fixed numeric value
if user scaling/units are on then these will be used. Ground
which can then be used to provide for instance a multiplica-
mode uses the trace ground as the vertical reference; refer-
tion factor or an offset for a measurement by using the
ence mode take the voltage reference as the reference. AC
multiply or add measurements.
RMS is used to calculate the AC component by taking the
mean of the trace as a reference. Parameters: value, name
Parameters: bounds, reference - DC only, name Result: dimensionless
3 Result: vertical
3.13.13 Rising/Falling Crossing
3.13.10 Area (Not available on Integra 10)
Applies to: YT traces, graphs, histograms Applies to: YT traces
Meaning: Meaning: These measurements return the voltage and time
of a particular transition of a waveform: this is specified as
YT traces & graphs: This returns the area, between the
the “nth” time a trace crosses a particular level in the rising
bounds specified, of a trace (either absolute or delta mode)
or falling direction. Units are either default or user specified.
in default units (generally volts-time) or if user scaling/units
Ground and reference modes are defined by the Crossing
are on then these will be used. Ground mode takes the ground
parameter of this measurement.
as the vertical reference; and in reference mode the voltage
reference will be used. This measurement displays the word AUTO if the trace does
not cross the specified level, indicating that the 50% of max/
Histograms: This returns the total number of samples in the
min level has been used instead.
histogram.
Parameters: bounds, top/base, crossing, crossing level,
Parameters: bounds, reference, name
transition no, name, marker - crossing voltage
Result: vertical
3.13.11 Trigger
(Not available on Integra 10)
Applies to: YT traces
Meaning: This gives the voltage and time at the trigger
position in default units, or user scaling/units where they
exist. The results are always relative to the vertical refer-
ence. Another measurement may be made to read in absolute
time by subtracting the trigger time.
Parameters: name, reference
84
3.13.14 Knee 3.13.16 Ratio

(Not available on Integra 10) (Not available on Integra 10)
Applies to: YT traces Applies to: measurement result
Meaning: This returns the voltage and time of the ‘knee’ of Meaning: This operator calculates the ratio of two previous
a waveform. The units are either default or user specified. measurement results. Where measurement results contain
Ground and reference modes are available. To find the knee more than one value (for example, cursor), the user can
positions, this measurement uses 30% and 70% crossings specify which values to divide. The operation will proceed
and extrapolates to the top or base as shown below. with no regard to units: by default, the result will be unitless.
The user is also able to select a user scaling and units for the
result of this calculation if desired.
Parameters: operands, scaling on/off, scaling, offset, anno- 3
knee tation, name
Result: vertical or horizontal
3.13.17 Multiply
Applies to: measurement result
knee Meaning: This is used to produce the product of two

previous measurement results. Where measurement results
contain more than one value (e.g. cursor), the user can
Figure 3.12.14 Knee Measurement specify which values to multiply. This operation has no
regard to units and by default, the result will be unitless. A
Parameters: bounds, top/base, reference, transition num-
user scaling and units for the result of this calculation can be
ber, top/bottom, name, marker - base/top
specified if desired.
Parameters: operands, scaling on/off, scaling, offset, anno-
tation, name
3.13.15 Sum/Delta Result: vertical or horizontal
Applies to: measurement result 3.13.18 Average
Meaning: This operator calculates the difference between, (Not available on Integra 10)
or the sum of, two previous measurement results. Where
measurement results contain more than one value (e.g.
cursor), the user can specify which values to subtract. Meaning: This measurement calculates the weighted aver-
age of a measurement result. Where a measurement result
This operation has no regard to units. The user is also able to
contains more than one value (e.g. cursor), the user can
select a user scaling and units for the result of this calculation
specify which values to average. The result of this calcula-
if desired.
tion is in the units of the measurement result to being
Parameters: operands, scaling on/off, scaling, offset, anno- averaged.
tation, name
Parameters: operand, weighting factor, reset, annotation,
Result: vertical or horizontal name
85
3.13.19 Logarithm/Antilog 3.13.23 FFT Harmonic

Applies to: measurement result Applies to: FFT Traces
Meaning: This is used to calculate the Log to base 10 of a Meaning: This returns the frequency and amplitude of a
measurement or 10 to the power of a measurement. harmonic. The harmonic number is specified by a parameter
in the FFT Harmonic Parameters menu.
Parameters: operand, annotation, name
Parameters: fundamental, harmonic number, reference noise
floor, name
3.13.20 Cosine
3 (Not available on Integra 10)
3.13.24 Reference
Meaning: This is used to calculate the Cosine of a measure-
Applies to: not applicable
ment and accepts measurements scaled in degrees.
Meaning: This returns the position of the voltage or time
Sine measurements can be obtained by simply adding 90°
reference line or the trace value where the trace crosses the
first.
time reference.
Parameters: operand, annotation, name
Parameters: time/voltage, time–at–reference, reference,
Result: vertical or horizontal name
3.13.21 Mean
(Not available on Integra 10) 3.13.25 Dimensioned Constant
Applies to: YT traces (Not available on Integra 10)
Meaning: This returns the mean value of the trace in volts. Applies to: not applicable
Parameters: bounds, reference, name Meaning: This is a fixed numeric value for vertical or
Result: vertical horizontal readings. The default value is 1.
Parameters: value, units, name
3.13.22 Count Result: vertical or horizontal
Applies to: YT traces 3.14 XY Measurements and Operators
Meaning: This returns the number of occurrences of the XY measurements are performed on the cursor trace only.
trace passing through a level. Locking the reference to the trace affects all XY measure-
ments. The following measurements are available on the
Parameters: bounds, top/base, crossing, crossing level, Integra 20 with advanced analysis option only.
transition, name
Result: horizontal
86
3.14.1 Cursor X, Y 3.14.5 Area

Applies to: XY trace Applies to: XY trace
Meaning: This returns the X,Y value of the cursor with Meaning: This returns the value of the area bounded by the
respect to the reference or ground expressed in volts, or other trace and the intersection of the vertical and horizontal
units if set, for the channel(s) concerned. references and is expressed in volts2, or other units if set, for
the channel(s) concerned. This measurement is only avail-
Parameters: name, reference, reference locked to trace
able if the trace is stored or held.
Result: vertical, vertical
Parameters: name, reference locked to trace, area fill
Result: vertical
3.14.2 Cursor t 3
3.14.6 Integration With Respect to x
Applies to: XY trace
Meaning: This returns the time value of the cursor with
respect to the reference or trigger expressed in seconds, or
other units if set, for the channel(s) concerned. If the refer- Meaning: This returns the integral of the area bounded by
ence is not locked to trace the measurement is with respect the vertical reference, the horizontal reference, the X posi-
to trigger. tion of the cursor and the cursor trace expressed in volts2, or
other units if set, for the channel(s) concerned. This mea-
Parameters: name, reference, reference locked to trace
surement is only available if the trace is stored or held.
Result: horizontal
Parameters: name, reference locked to trace, area fill
Result: vertical
3.14.3 Radius
3.14.7 Constant
Meaning: This returns the distance from the cursor to the
Applies to: not applicable
reference (Ground/reference and lock/unlocked to trace)
expressed in volts, or other units if set, for the channel(s) Meaning: This is used to provide a fixed numeric value
concerned. which can then be used to provide for instance a multiplica-
tion factor or an offset for a measurement by using the
Parameters: name, reference locked to trace
multiply or add measurements.
Result: vertical
Parameters: value, name
3.14.4 Angle
3.14.8 Operators
Meaning: This returns the angle between the line joining the
The operators for YT trace (DELTA, SUM, RATIO, MLT,
cursor to the reference (Ground/reference and lock/un-
AVERAGE, LOG, ANTILOG, COS) are also able to oper-
locked to trace) and the vertical reference, expressed in
ate on the results of XY measurements.
degrees as viewed on the screen, and does not take into
account any different trace scalings.
Parameters: name, reference locked to trace
Result: vertical
87
3.15 Trace On/Off Menu

The selection of which traces are to be displayed when the
DSO is in Main, Zoom or Main & Zoom mode is controlled
by the Trace menu.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . TRC1
. . . OFF
. . ON
. . 1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . TRC2
. . . OFF
. . ON
. . 2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . TRC3
. . . OFF
. . ON
. . 3
3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRC4
. . . OFF
. . ON
. . 4
. . . . . . . . . . . . . TRC5
. . . OFF
. . ON
. . 5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . TRC6
. . . OFF
. . ON
. . 6
. . . . . . . . . . . . . TRC7
. . . UNUSED
. . . . 7
. . . . . . . . . . . . . TRC8 . . . OFF
. . ON
. . 8
Press Trace On/Off for Trace Analysis
Figure 3.15 Trace Menu

This menu is obtained by pressing the Trace On/Off button
(35), which cycles through the Trace menu, the Trace
Analysis menu and the normal trace display. Three versions
of this menu exist, one for Main only, one for Zoom only and
one for Main & Zoom. The version that is displayed depends
on the current display mode as set by the Main/Zoom
button (37).
If no signal has been mapped to a particular trace, the
annotation alongside the trace button will say Unused.
To map signals to traces, press the Trace On/Off button
(35) a second time to get the Trace Analysis menu.
3.15.1 Main & Zoom mode

To turn traces on and off while in Main and Zoom mode, the
cursor buttons 1 to 8 should be used.
Each button is labeled with its trace number and OFF M Z.
M stands for Main and Z stands for Zoom. Each press of the
numeric button cycles through the sequence: OFF, M, Z, M
& Z and OFF etc.
3.15.2 Main Only and Zoom Only modes

To turn traces on and off in Main only or Zoom only modes,
use the appropriate front panel button which is labeled with
the trace number, e.g. button one is labeled TRC1.
88
4.1 Integra 10, 15, 20 and 40 Verification Frequency Synthesizer

Procedure Suggested Equipment: HP 3335A
Ranges Accuracy
This chapter contains a performance evaluation procedure. 1KHz to 25MHz ±.07 dB
To ensure proper results, only qualified individuals with the
required equipment should attempt this procedure. Synthesized RF Generator
This Field Performance Testing procedure is designed to Suggested Equipment: Fluke 6060B
allow users to verify that their Integra Series System meets Range: 10 kHz to 1000 MHz
its published specifications. Accuracy: ±1.0 dB at or above 0.4 MHz; ± 2.0 dB below
0.4 MHz
These procedures are based upon and are traceable to the
automated procedure used during the manufacture and test Frequency Counter
of the Integra. Suggested Equipment: Fluke 1912A Multi-Counter
Range Accuracy
5 - 525 MHz ±One Count
4.1.1 Recommended Intervals
4
Your Integra Series System should be tested and/or cali- Multimeter
brated on an annual basis (1 year). Additionally, the product Suggested Equipment: Fluke 8022A
should be tested and/or calibrated following the repair or 4.5 digit Resolution
replacement of any assembly or whenever you are con-
cerned about the performance of the instrument Function Generator
Suggested Equipment: Wave Tek 143
Functions
4.1.2 Traceability Triangular Waveform
All equipment used for this procedure must be in calibration 10 Vpp
and traceable to the National Institute of Standards and
Technology. Special Equipment
Some of the tests require a signal input to both inputs of the
4.1.3 Test Conditions channel under test. Use a coax “T” connector and two coax
Calibration should be performed under normal room tem- cables of equal length for these tests.
perature and humidity.
4.1.5 Units Conversion Formulas
4.1.4 Required Equipment rms = .7071 x peak
DC Calibrator dBm = 10 Log ((Vrms 2 ÷ 50ohms) ÷ .001)
Suggested Equipment: Data Precision 8200
Ranges Accuracy
± 100 mV ± (60 ppm rdg+ 1 µV) 4.1.6 Warm-up
± 10 V ± (10 ppm rdg+ 10 µV) Allow the system under test and all test equipment to warm-
± 100 V ± (10 ppm rdg + 100 µV) up for a minimum of 30 minutes to 1 hour prior to beginning
the performance testing and calibration procedure.
AC Calibrator
Suggested Equipment: Fluke 5200
Ranges Accuracy 4.1.7 Initial Control Settings
±1 mV
Each procedure of this manual requires specific front panel
10 mV
control settings. Before beginning each section return the
100 mV
unit to its default front panel state. Ground the inputs of all
1V ±(0.33% of setting + 0.03% of Range)
channels not under test and turn them off. Additional
deviations from the default state are called out in each
procedure.
89
4.1.8 Default Front Panel States Each of these procedures requires that data be captured
before measurements are made. Press the Hold Next button
This procedure returns the Integra to the default front panel
(20) each time you wish to collect data.
states. To perform a “cold boot”, press and hold the Hold
Next button (20) and press the On/Standby button (40). Peak to Peak Measurement
Continue to hold down the Hold Next button (20) until you
1. Press the Measure Menu button (14) on the Integra
hear two beeps. The instrument then restarts and resets to a
front panel.
default mode.
2. Press the soft key labeled Insert.
Integra 10/20
3. Use the DOWN or UP soft key until the measure function
Storage = LIVE
Peak-to-Peak is highlighted, then press Select.
Time 4. Use the DOWN or UP soft key until the trace, TRC1, is
1 MHz = 100 µS highlighted. Press the Select soft key.
Trigger
5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 so that TRC2, TRC3 and TRC4
Source = Channel 1
4 Slope = Positive
all have Peak-to-Peak functions turned on.
Coupling = DC 6. Press the Measure Menu button (14) on the Integra
Sensitivity = Zero front panel. Verify that the lower left hand corner of the
Level = Zero Integra display indicates that a PK-PK value for all four
Auto/Norm = Auto active traces is indicated.
Note: The peak find routines will not work on low amplitude
All Ch = On differences. Use vertical expansion as needed to
Volts = 5V/div increase the amplitude differences of the displayed
All Inputs = GND data.
Position ≈ 0.0
Mean Measurement (available in Integra 15, 20, 40, and
Display = Data 60 with Advanced Analysis Option only)
Expansion = Off 1. Press the Measure Menu button (14) on the Integra
X/Y-Y/T = Y/T front panel.
Grid = On
2. Press the soft key labeled Insert.
4.1.9 Measurement Techniques 3. Use the DOWN or UP soft key until the measure function
The YT Measurements that are standard in the Integra will Mean is highlighted, then press Select.
allow you to quickly verify that your Nicolet Integra system 4. Use the DOWN or UP soft key until the trace, TRC1, is
is operating within it’s published specifications. Below is a highlighted. Press the Select soft key.
quick overview of the measurements that are required.
Please refer to Section 3.13 for a more detailed description
all have Mean functions turned on.
of each of the measurement functions.
The following measurement techniques are used throughout
front panel. Verify that the lower left hand corner of the
the performance procedures. Any deviation from these
Integra display indicates that a “mean” value for all four
techniques can give erroneous results.
active traces is indicated.
To use the measurements of the Integra, a sequence of the
required measurements and calculations is set using the
Measurement Functions menu. This is obtained by pressing
the Measure Menu button (27) on the Integra front panel.
A measurement is inserted into the sequence and then the
parameters for that measurement are set. Measurements can
be added to the end of the sequence, inserted between
existing measurements or deleted from the sequence. Please
review Section 3.12.7 for additional information.
90
Cursor RMS
Note: “Cursor” mode will have to be used in systems that do RMS is used to verify that the Integra meets its bandwidth
not have the optional “MEAN” function built into specification.
them. COLD BOOT the system before use and do not
change the position of the trace from its default
front panel.
position. Use the “Cursor” function in place of the
“MEAN” function only when necessary. 2. Press the soft key labeled Insert.
1. Press the Measure Menu button (14) on the Integra 3. Use the DOWN or UP soft key until the measure function
front panel. RMS is highlighted, then press Select.
2. Press the soft key labeled Insert. 4. Use the DOWN or UP soft key until the trace, TRC1, is
highlighted. Press the Select soft key.
3. Use the DOWN or UP soft key until the measure function
Cursor is highlighted, then press Select. 5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 so that TRC2, TRC3 and TRC4
all have RMS functions turned on.
4. Use the DOWN soft key until the trace, TRC1, is high-
lighted. Press the Select soft key. 6. Press the Measure Menu button (14) on the Integra 4
Integra display indicates that a “RMS” value for all four
all have Cursor functions turned on.
active traces is indicated.
Integra display indicates that a “Cursor” value for all 4.2 12-Bit Performance Testing
four active traces is indicated. Execute these performance tests on each channel whenever
Averaging you service the unit, or upon completion of calibration
adjustments. Failure of a performance test indicates the need
Averaging is used when taking DC gain measurements to for calibration or repair. Contact Nicolet Technologies at
eliminate noise. (608) 276-5600 (phone) or (608) 273-6873 (fax) in the
1. Press the Main menu button (12) on the Integra front United States for the address and fax number of your nearest
panel. authorized Nicolet Technologies Service Center.
2. Press the soft key labeled Acquisition. These procedures are appropriate for use with the Integra10
and 20.
3. Press the soft key labeled Averaging (OFF). A menu will
appear.
4. Press the soft key labeled Averaging (AV): OFF ON,
until ON is highlighted.
5. Press the right cursor move button until the Averaging
Value: selection is 16.
6. Press the soft key labeled Return. Verify that the Acqui-
sition Menu indicates that Averaging is ON, and that 16
sweeps are selected.
91
4.2.1 DC Gain Error Test 4.2.2 Common Mode Rejection (Differential

Models Only)
Required Equipment: DC Calibrator
Required Equipment: AC Calibrator
Concept
Concept
The DC gain error is found by measuring plus and minus DC
voltages of known value, accuracy, and zero offset and The Common Mode Rejection is found by inputting a sine
comparing the measured value against the input value. The wave of the specified voltage and frequency into both the
voltages must be approximately ±45% of the range. Com- plus and minus DC coupled inputs of the channel under test.
pute the error by subtracting the voltage input to the channel The CMR is measured for each frequency using the RMS
under test from the voltage measured by the scope and measurement procedure. The measured RMS value of the
compared to the limits for each range. The DC gain error waveform should be less than the CMR limit specified for
specification is ±0.25% of input range. each range and frequency.
Procedure Procedure
Repeat this process for each range listed using the positive Follow this procedure for each voltage range of the channel
4 input then repeat for the negative input. Use auto trigger to under test. The input voltage is the same for several ranges.
collect the data.
Note: In order to collect data properly, the Integra must be
1. Select DC Input Coupling and enable the mean/cursor triggered externally. Use the external trigger output
(for all channels under test) and average functions as of your function generator and set the Integra trigger
described earlier. mode to the EXT NORM mode. Make certain that the
Integra is triggered before making your measurements
2. Input the indicated negative voltage for the range under
test into the plus input of the channel under test. 1. Disable the average function. Enable the RMS function
(replacing the mean/cursor measurements used in the
Press the Hold Next button (20). The system collects
previous steps). Select the channel, range and frequency
and averages 16 sweeps.
to be tested. Select DC input coupling for the plus and
3. Record the Mean/Cursor voltage of the averaged data. minus input.
Record its absolute value. (Ignore the (-) minus sign)
2. Press the Live button (19). Input the specified sine wave
4. Input the equivalent positive voltage. at the specified frequency and voltage for the range
under test into the plus and minus inputs of the channel
Press the Hold Next button (20) to capture the positive
under test. Press the Hold Next button (20) button.
voltage data.
3. Record the peak to peak value of the captured waveform
Record the Mean/Cursor voltage of the averaged data.
Add this value to the value recorded in step 3. The sum data.
of the voltages should be within the error limit of the total 4. Verify that the measured peak to peak value is less than
input voltage. (EX: 36.0mV input ±0.100mV) the corresponding test limit for the range and frequency
under test.
5. Repeat this process for each range listed and for each
channel. 5. Repeat this process for each range and frequency listed
Input range Input voltage Error limit and then for each channel.
40 mV ±18.0 mV ±0.100mV Voltage Input 1 kHz 100 kHz
80 mV ±36.0 mV ±0.200 mV Ranges Voltage (60 dB) (40 dB)
160 mV ±72.0 mV ±0.400 mV (rms) Test Limit Test Limit
400 mV ±180.0 mV ±1.00 mV .04 mV to 1.6 mV 3.554 3.5 mV 35.4 mV
800 mV ±360.0 mV ±2.00 mV 4 V to 16 V 35.35 35.4 mV 354 mV
1.6 V ±720.0 mV ±4.00 mV 40 V to 160 V 70.71 70.7 mV 707 mV
4V ±1.80 V ±10.00 mV
8V ±3.60 V ±20.00 mV
16 V ±7.20 V ±40.00 mV
40 V ±18.00 V ±100.0 mV
80 V ±36.00 V ±200.0 mV
160 V ±72.00 V ±400.0 mV
92
4.2.3 Bandwidth 4.2.4 Procedure for the Integra 10, 15, 20 and 40
Required Equipment: Frequency Synthesizer 1. Select the channel to test. Select DC coupling for the
50 W Terminator positive input and GND coupling for the negative input.
Concept Set the full scale range to 40 mV.
Test each channel’s bandwidth by comparing the measured 2. Set the Time per Point to 50 µS. Input a 1.02 kHz sine
peak amplitude of a sine wave at a low frequency to the wave of the indicated amplitude for the voltage range
measured peak amplitude of a sine wave with the same input under test (see table below). Press the Hold Next button
amplitude at the full bandwidth frequency. The input sine (20).
wave needs to be approximately 90% of the full scale range
3. Record the RMS amplitude of the collected sine wave
being tested, up to a maximum of the generator’s capability
(use the RMS function). This is Vlf.
(13.0 dBm typically). The measured amplitude at the full
bandwidth frequency should be not more than 3 dB less than 4. Set the Time per Point to 1 mS (100ns for the Integra 40).
the amplitude measured at the low frequency. Input a sine wave of the indicated amplitude and fre-
quency for the voltage range under test. Press the Hold
dBm = 10* log10((Vrms2 ÷ R)÷0.001)
Next button (20). 4
where: Vrms = (Vp-p÷2)*.7071
5. Record the RMS amplitude of the collected sine wave
and R = input impedance (50W) (use the RMS function). This is Vbw.
dB = 20* log10(Vlf÷Vbw) 6. Calculate the attenuation in dB using the formula shown
above. The calculated result should not be greater than
where: Vlf = measured RMS amplitude of low frequency
3 dB.
sine wave
7. Repeat steps 2 through 6 for the 80 mV through 160 V
and Vbw = measured RMS amplitude of full
ranges.
bandwidth sine wave.
8. Repeat steps 2 through 7 for the remaining channels.
40 mV through 160 V ranges

Integra 10, 15, 20 Integra 40
Full Scale Low Bandwidth Bandwidth Input Input Input 3 dB value
Range Frequency Frequency Frequency (Vp-p) (Vrms) (dBm) (V)
40 mV 1.02 kHz 502 kHz 5.02M 27 mV 9.6 mV -27.39 6.8 mV
160 mV 1.02 kHz 502 kHz 5.02M 108 mV 38.2 mV -15.35 27 mV
800 mV 1.02 kHz 502 kHz 5.02M 540 mV 191 mV -1.37 135 mV
1.6 V 1.02 kHz 502 kHz 5.02M 1.09 V 384 m V 4.70 272 mV
4V 1.02 kHz 502 kHz 5.02M 2.70 V 954 m V 12.60 675 mV
8V 1.02 kHz 502 kHz 5.02M 2.82 V 1V 13.00 707 mV
16 V 1.02 kHz 502 kHz 5.02M 2.82 V 1V 13.00 707 mV
40 V 1.02 kHz 502 kHz 5.02M 2.82 V 1V 13.00 707 mV
80 V 1.02 kHz 502 kHz 5.02M 2.82 V 1V 13.00 707 mV
160 V 1.02 kHz 502 kHz 5.02M 2.82 V 1V 13.00 707 mV
93
4.2.5 RMS Noise 4.3 Integra 60 Verification Procedure

Required Equipment: Unit Under Test This sectioncontains a performance evaluation procedure.
Concept To ensure proper results, only qualified individuals with the
required equipment should attempt this procedure.
The RMS noise of each channel is found by measuring the
standard deviation of data captured with no input signal, and This Field Performance Testing procedure is designed to
the plus and minus coupling (if the Integra has the differen- allow users to verify that their Integra 60 system meets its
tial option) switches set to AC. published specifications. Should any of these fail to be
within specification, then it is recommended that the instru-
Model Input Range Specification
ment be re-calibrated. Contact Nicolet Technologies Cus-
12 Bit 1MHz 40 mV to 160 V 0.10 % Full Scale
tomer Service tel: 608/276-5600 or fax: 608/273-5061.
Outside the U.S., call your local Nicolet office or distributor.
1 MHz
Range Noise Limit Instead of setting the instrument to 50 W termination where
40 mV 0.040 mV directed in the following sections, a 50 W terminator, which
4 80 mV 0.080 mV should be fitted at the instrument end of the cable, may be
160 mV 0.160 mV used.
400 mV 0.40 mV
800 mV 0.80 mV
4.3.1 Bandwidth
1.60 V 1.60 mV
4V 4.0 mV Equipment required: Signal generator, 50 W coaxial cable.
8V 8.0 mV
Connect the signal generator to a channel input (set to 50 W)
16 V 16.0 mV
through the coax cable.
40 V 40.0 mV
80 V 80.0 mV 1. Select 10 mV per division on the input channel and set
160 V 160.0 mV the timebase to 50 µs per division.
2. Set the amplitude of the signal generator to give six
Procedure divisions at 50 kHz or similar reference frequency.
1. Select the channel to test. Set the plus and minus inputs 3. Increase the frequency of the signal generator until the
(if applicable) to AC. Set the Time per Point to equal 1 peak to peak amplitude reduces to 4.2 divisions.
µS and the range to 40 mV.
The measured frequency should be greater than 200 MHz.
2. Press Hold Next button (20).
3. Measure the noise by using the enabled RMS function on 4.3.2 Trigger Sensitivity
the collected data. The result should be less than the
specified noise limit in the chart above. Equipment required: Signal generator, 50 W coaxial cable.
4. Repeat step 1-3 for all voltage ranges. Connect the signal generator to a channel input (set to 50 W)
5. Repeat steps 1 - 4 with the Time per Point set to 200 µS.
1. Select 100 mV per division on the input channel and set
the timebase to 50 µs per division.
This concludes performance verification 2. Select Auto trigger.
3. Set the signal generator to 50 kHz or similar reference
frequency and adjust the amplitude to give 33.3 mV peak
to peak.
4. Select AC coupling and Norm on the trigger controls.
It should now be possible to find a suitable trigger level to
obtain a stable picture.
94
4.3.3 Trigger Bandwidth 4.3.5 Vertical Calibration

Equipment required: Signal generator, 50 W coaxial cable. Equipment required: Signal generator, 50 W coaxial cable.
Connect the signal generator to a channel input (set to 50 W) Connect the signal generator to a channel input, which must
through the coax cable. be set to 1 MW, through the coax cable.
1. Select 100 mV per division on the input channel and set 1. Set the timebase to 500 µs per division and select 10 mV
the timebase to 50 µs per division. per division for the input channel.
2. Set the amplitude of the signal generator to give one 2. Set the signal generator to give 50 mV peak to peak, i.e.
division at 50 kHz or similar reference frequency. 5 screen divisions.
3. Select AC coupling and Norm on the trigger controls. 3. Adjust the trigger level to give a stable picture.
4. Without adjusting its amplitude, set the signal generator 4. Switch the cursors on. Refer to operation manual sec-
to 200 MHz. tions 2.4, 3.12 and 3.13 for details on how to make cursor
measurements.
It should be possible to adjust the trigger level to give a stable
display. The peak to peak measurement should be 50 mV to within 4
2%±1 LSB (2%=1 mV, 1 LSB=0.33 mV therefore range is
50±1.33mV) and the trace should be 5 divisions high to
4.3.4 Timebase Calibration within ±0.1 divisions.
Equipment required: Time calibrator or pulse generator, 50 These measurements should be repeated on all the attenuator
W coaxial cable. ranges, each time setting the signal generator to 5 screen
Connect the signal generator to a channel input (set to 50 W) divisions for the selected range.
1. Set the calibrator or pulse generator to produce markers
every 50 µs.
2. Set the timebase to 50 µs per division and set the channel
attenuator to give between two and five vertical divisions
of signal.
3. Set DC coupling and Norm on the trigger controls.
4. Adjust the trigger level to give a stable trace.
5. Select the cursors. Refer to operation manual sections
2.4, 3.12 and 3.13 for details on how to make cursor
measurements.
Place the time reference line and the cursor on identical
positions on any two different markers, the time difference
should read in multiples of 50 µs within 0.1%.
95
Appendix 1: Screen Messages CANNOT RUN WHILE EDITING

If an attempt is made to run a sequence while in edit or
When something is wrong or not allowed, an error message
learn mode.
may be displayed. In some cases, a message appears to
confirm that an action is occurring or has occurred. Brief CANNOT RUN WHILE RUNNING
explanation of when these messages occur are given below If an attempt is made to run a sequence that is already
in alphabetical order: running.
** AUTO–SETUP ** CANNOT SET SCALING IN XY
While the instrument is performing its Auto Setup If an attempt is made to use measurement scaling while
routine. the instrument is in XY mode.
ALL sequence steps in use command failed
If an attempt is made to use more than 240 steps in total A GPIB/RS423 command was not correctly actioned.
in sequences.
command not known
argument expected GPIB/RS423, An unknown command was received.
GPIB/RS423 The argument to a command or a query is
command only
missing.
A query form of an instruction that is only a command
A1 argument not known was received.
GPIB/RS423 does not recognize the argument to a
DATA CHECKSUM FAILURE
command or query.
Following a data transfer to the DSO if the checksum
A TRIG:NOT IN USE does not calculate correctly.
If an attempt is made to change any of the A trigger
data expected
settings when the A trigger is not in use.
GPIB/RS423, data was expected in the command but
AUTHORIZATION CODE INVALID was not received.
The wrong authorization cade was entered while trying
data not expected
to upgrade a software option.
GPIB/RS423, data was not expected in the command
Auto–Setup Cancelled but was received.
If Cancel is pressed while the instrument is performing
DESTINATION AS CURSOR TRACE
its Auto Setup routine.
If an attempt is made to set the destination trace to be the
AUTOSETUP ALREADY IN PROGRESS same as the cursor trace for either graphs or histograms.
If AUTO SETUP is pressed during an autosetup.
DELAY TO SWEEP
AUTO CALIBRATING While a long trigger delay is in progress a countdown
While the instrument is performing its Auto calibration time is displayed.
routine.
ENTRY NOT ALLOWED IN SEQUENCE
AVERAGING DISABLED IN ROLL If an attempt is made to include one of the disallowed
If averaging is selected while the instrument is in roll mas storage operations in a sequence.
mode.
ERROR: File line
B TRIG:NOT IN USE An internal software problem has occurred. Note the
If an attempt is made to change any of the B trigger numbers and turn the DSO off and on to reset. Please
settings when the B trigger is not in use. inform your local service agent of the numbers.
Calibration Completed ERROR SEQ. RECURSION NOT ALLOWED
When an internal calibration is complete. If an attempt is made while learning or editing a se-
CANNOT EDIT WHILE RUNNING quence to include a recursive step such as sequence 1
calling sequence 2 which then calls sequence 1.
If an attempt is made to edit a sequence while it is
running. excessive data
CANNOT GRAPH IN XY GPIB/RS423, too much data was received.
If an attempt is made to use graphing while the instru-
ment is in XY mode.
96
GRAPH RUNNING invalid selection

If an attempt is made to start histograms while graphs GPIB/RS423 If an attempt is made to choose an invalid
are running. selection.
GPIB dcas Invalid value entered
When the DSO has received and actioned a IEEE 488.2 If an attempt is made to enter invalid data, such as some
Device Clear command. alpha characters instead of a number.
GPIB deadlock INVERTING
A GPIB deadlock occurred because the DSO input and While a post storage trace inversion is occurring.
output queues were both full. L.TEST AVAILABLE IN REFR ONLY
GPIB ifc If limits test is selected and the instrument is not in
When the DSO has received and actioned an IEEE refreshed mode.
488.3 Interface Clear command. LINE TRIG:AC hf–rej ONLY
GPIB interrupted If an attempt is made to set the coupling to anything
A new program message was received before the entire other than AC hf–rej when the source is line.
response message had been read. LOCAL LOCKOUT
GPIB received GET When the instrument is in local lockout mode. A1
The GPIB GET (Group Execute Trigger) bus command LOCKED WHEN GRAPH IS RUNNING
has been received.
If an attempt is made to change any graph parameters
GPIB REMOTE when a graph is running.
When the DSO is in GPIB remote mode. LOCKED WHEN HISTOGRAM RUNNING
GPIB unterminated If an attempt is made to change any histogram param-
A response message was read before terminating the eters when a histogram is running.
program message. LOWER LIMIT SET
GPIB unexpected EOI When a lower limit trace has been successfully set for
EOI was received during a command sequence when a limits testing.
further instruction or parameter was expected. Measurement: illegal data
HISTOGRAM RUNNING When the specified measurement cannot be performed.
If an attempt is made to start graphs while histograms e.g. when the cursor and reference do not enclose a
are running. repetitive waveform for a frequency measurement.
illegal data MIN IS NOT LESS THAN MAX
GPIB/RS423 Data received by the DSO is not allowed. If an attempt is made to set the minimum value to more
e.g. text where a number is expected. than the maximum value for either graphs or histo-
illegal measurement grams.
If an attempt is made to set graphs or histograms when NO AVERAGE IN ROLL
a measurement that is not allowed is selected. If an attempt is made to select averaging when the
input too long instrument is in Roll mode.
GPIB/RS423 The command sequence received by the No valid input
DSO is too long. If autosetup cannot find a suitable input.
invalid mode NOT COMPATIBLE WITH BINARY MODE
GPIB/RS423 If an attempt to set up an invalid mode is If XON/XOFF handshake is selected when in binary
made. mode.
Invalid number entered NOT COMPATIBLE WITH XON/XOFF
If an attempt to enter a number that is outside the If binary mode is selected with XON/XOFF handshake
permitted range for a particular feature. already selected.
97
No Trigger Found SEQUENCE RUN ABORTED

During Auto setup, a valid signal was recognised but the If a sequence is stopped before it has reached the end
DSO was unable to trigger from it. and finished running.
PLOT ABORTED, Flushing Buffer SEQUENCE RUN COMPLETE
After a plot has be aborted. When a sequence has reached the end and finished
PLOTTER BUSY FOR 10 SECONDS running.
The DSO tried to communicate with the internal plotter SETUP EMPTY
but did not get a response. May be due to a faulty plotter If the selected setup memory has not been used.
or to the head being lifted during a plot. SETUP RECALLED
PLOTTER FAULT When a setup has been successfully recalled from
There is something wrong with the thermal plotter not memory.
covered by other messages. SOFT KEY ALREADY ASSIGNED
PLOTTER HEAD RAISED If an attempt is made to asign a soft key to a sequence
If an attempt is made to plot to the internal thermal and the soft key has already been assigned to another
plotter while its head is raised. sequence.
A1 PLOTTER HOT – ALLOW TO COOL string expected
If the internal thermal plotter gets too hot while it is GPIB/RS423 Text enclosed by “ “ was expected but not
plotting. received by the DSO.
PLOTTER OUT OF PAPER THE CURSORs ARE OFF
If an attempt is made to plot to the internal plotter and If an attempt is made to set measurement scaling when
it runs out of paper. the dataum and cursors are not on.
PRESS AGAIN TO AUTOSETUP THE TIME CURSOR AND DATUM ARE THE SAME
If autosetup is pressed. If an attempt is made to use datum to cursor scaling
PRESS AGAIN TO CONFIRM when the dataum and cursor are at the same point.
If an attempt is made to change the Sweep Length. Time entered Invalid
query only If an attempt to enter an invalid time is made such as
25:32:93.
GPIB/RS423 If a command form of an query only
instruction is received. TRACE COPIED
RS423 REMOTE When a trace has been successfully copied to a refer-
ence trace.
When the Instrument is in RS423 Remote mode.
TRACE RECALLED
SEQUENCE ABORT IN INPUT
When a trace has been successfully recalled from
If a sequence is stopped while it was at a wait for input
memory.
step.
TRACE SAVED
SEQUENCE ABORT IN PAUSE
When a trace has been successfully saved to memory.
If a sequence is stopped while it was at a pause step.
TRIG:A & TRIG B COMMON SOURCE
SEQUENCE ABORT IN WAIT
If an attempt is made to independently set the two
If a sequence is stopped while it was at a wait step.
trigger sources while in TV trigger mode.
SEQUENCE ALREADY RUNNING
TRIG:NOT IN USE
If an attempt is made to run a sequence that is already
If an attempt is made to change any of the A trigger
running.
settings when the A trigger is not in use or the B trigger
SEQUENCE EMPTY settings when the B trigger is not in use.
If an attempt is made to run a sequence that has no steps. TV TRIG:AC COUPLING ONLY
If trigger coupling is set to anything other than AC while
TV trigger is selected.
98
TV TRIG:Changing sync Mass Memory Errors

If an attempt is made to change the trigger slope from There are a number of errors associated with memory
the front panel when in TV trigger mode. storage devices. Most of these are self explanatory and
TV TRIG:NO AUTO TRIGGER generally point to a problem with the selected storage
If Auto trigger is selected when in TV trigger mode device. The problem may be that the device is write pro-
tected or that the device has been misused and may have
TV TRIG:SLOPE DISABLED some data corruption.
If an attempt is made to change the trigger slope when
in TV trigger mode. These errors are listed below:
TV TRIG: NO LINE TRIG SOURCE COULDN’T CREATE DIRECTORY

If Line is selected when in TV trigger mode COULDN’T CREATE RUN
UPPER LIMIT SET COULDN’T CREATE RUN NUMBER
When a upper limit trace has been successfully set for COULDN’T CREATE SEQUENCE DIRECTORY
limits testing. COULDN’T CREATE SETUP DIRECTORY
VALUE OUT OF RANGE COULDN’T CREATE USER
If the number entered is too large or small for the feature COULDN’T DELETE OBJECT
in use. COULDN’T INITIALISE DEVICE A1
WAITING FOR TRIGGER A THEN B COULDN’T READ DATA FROM DEVICE
If S/shot has been selected but no A and or B trigger has COULDN’T RENAME OBJECT
been received. COULDN’T WRITE DATA TO DEVICE
WAITING FOR TRIGGER A DEVICE FULL
If S/shot has been selected but no A trigger has been DEVICE IS WRITE PROTECTED
received. DEVICE NOT AVAILABLE
WAITING FOR TRIGGER B DEVICE NOT MOUNTED
If S/shot has been selected but no B trigger has been FILE DOES NOT CONTAIN A VALID SEQUENCE
received.
FILE DOES NOT CONTAIN A VALID SETUP
WARNING:CALC ALREADY SELECTED FILE DOES NOT CONTAIN A VALID TRACE
If the same calculation is selected for more than 1 cursor INVALID NAME
measurement.
INVALID OPERATION
WARNING INFINITE PERSISTENCE
MEMORY ALLOCATION ERROR, RETRY
If infinite persistence has been selected and S/Shot is
NO FILE PRESENT FOR RECALL
pressed.
NOT A VALID SEQUENCE
WARNING:NO Y TRACE VISIBLE
NOT A VALID TRACE
If XY mode is selected and only CH1 is turned on
OBJECT ALREADY EXISTS
WARNING:REFERENCE TRACE OFF
RUN NAME DOES NOT EXIST
If an attempt is made to select a reference trace to
RUN NUMBER DOES NOT EXIST
display from the Main and Zoom Trace Display menu
before that reference trace has been turned on from the RUN NUMBER IS OUT OF RANGE
Display Master Menu. SELECTED USER DOES NOT EXIST ON DEVICE
WARNING:VALUE FORCED INTO RANGE SEQUENCE FILE DOES NOT EXIST
GPIB/RS423 The argument was not an allowable value SETUP FILE DOES NOT EXIST
and was rounded to the nearest suitable number. TRACE FILE DOES NOT EXIST
99
Appendix 2: Specifications
The Integra Family of High Resolution Transient and Recording DSOs
Integra Specifications Summary Integra 10 Integra 15 Integra 20 Integra 40 Integra 60

Transient (T) or Recording (R) DSO T T and R T and R T T
Vertical Number of channels 4 4 4 4 4
Vertical resolution 12-bits 12-bits 12-bits 12-bits 8-bits
Bandwidth (Analog -3dB) 500 kHz 500 kHz 500 kHz 5 MHz 200 MHz
Differential Inputs Optional Optional Standard Standard -
Integrated signal conditioning - - Optional - -
Horizontal Maximum sample rate 1MS/s 1MS/s 1MS/s 20 MS/s 100 MS/s
Standard memory per channel 10 kS 10 kS 50 kS 50 kS 50 kS
Maximum memory per channel 50 kS 50 kS 2 MS 1 MS 200 kS

Direct to disk recording - Standard Standard* - -
Direct to writer recording - Standard** Standard** - -

A2 Dual sample rates - - Standard - -
Slow/Fast/SlowAcquisition - - Standard - -
A3 Triggering Advancedtriggering - - Standard Standard Standard
Glitch detect - - Standard Standard Standard

A4 Display Display Monochrome Color Color Color Color
Roll, persistence, averaging, multi-shot Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard

A5 Analysis Engineering units Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard
Parametermeasurements Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard
Advanced waveform analysis - Optional Optional Optional Optional
Custommeasurements/sequences - Optional Optional Optional Optional
I/O Floppy drive Optional Standard Standard Standard Standard
Hard disk drive, 500 MB - Standard Optional Optional Optional
Battery backed 1 M RAM disk - Optional Optional Optional Optional
Integrated thermal writer - Optional Optional Optional Optional
Hard copy to laser/inkjet Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard

Parallel, serial interfaces Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard
GPIB/IEEE-488.2 interface Optional Optional Standard Standard Standard
* Requires optional hard disk option, ** Requires optional integrated writer option
100
INTERNAL TRIGGER
10 Integra 10
Range
100% of input voltage range
Sensitivity
VERTICAL
Variable noise reject from > 0.01 division
Number of Channels
Four Single Ended (Differential optional) EXTERNAL TRIGGER
Analog Bandwidth
DC - 500 kHz (-3 dB) Range
Vertical Sensitivity 12 Volts Full Scale (±6 Volts)
5 mV - 20 V/div in a 1-2-5 sequence Sensitivity
Vertical Resolution Variable noise reject from > 20 mV
12 bits (0.025%) Coupling
Accuracy AC, DC, 1 kHz LF reject, 15 kHz HF reject
< ± 0.25 % Full Scale Bandwidth
Maximum Static Error (MSE) > 1 MHz
Offset Error
❏ 40 - 160 mV range ...................... ± 0.4% Full Scale AUTO SETUP
❏ 0.4 - 160 V range ........................ ± 0.2% Full Scale Selects voltage range, timebase and trigger level for
Input Impedance repetitive signals.
1MΩ ± 0.5%, ≈ 50 pF Minimum input frequency: 10 Hz A2
Coupling
DC, GND, AC (–3 dB at 1.5 Hz)
DISPLAY
Position Range A3
0 - 100% of Full Scale Type
Safe Overload 5.6" Monochrome Liquid Crystal
± 240 Volts RMS to 500 Hz, 360 V DC peak Modes A4
Differential Inputs (optional) CMRR Roll, Refresh, XY, Single-shot, Persistence
❏ DC (5mV/div - 200mV/div ranges) ............. 72 dB
❏ 1 kHz ............................................................. 60 dB STORAGE A5
❏ 100 kHz ......................................................... 40 dB
RAM Disk
45 kByte, battery backed
HORIZONTAL
Floppy Disk (optional)
Timebase Range (per channel) 3.5", 720 kB/1.44 MB MS-DOS™ format
1 MS/s to 0.25 S/s in 1, 2, 5 time/div. steps Files
Timebase Accuracy Waveform data and front panel setups
± 0.01%
Sweep Length (number of points) INTERFACES
500, 1 k, 2 k, 5 k, 10 k, 20k*, 50 k*
* via optional 50 k memory expansion ❏ Centronics, RS-423
External Clock ❏ GPIB / IEEE-488.2 (optional)
500 kHz maximum
PLOTTING
TRIGGER Output in HP-GL or PCL3 via RS-423, Centronics, or
Source optional IEEE-488.2 ports with full annotation.
Any channel, external, AC line
Slope
Positive, Negative, Dual
Pretrigger
0 - 100% of sweep in 0.2% steps
Trigger Delay
0 - 999 seconds
101
WAVEFORM ANALYSIS
15 Integra 15
Measurements
Up to 50 measurements can be made simultaneously. Stan-
dard pulse measurements can be performed using 10%, 50%
VERTICAL
and 90% points or by bounds defined by cursors or other
measurements. Measurements can be assigned to any trace Number of Channels
and made with respect to ground or the cursor. Four Single Ended (Differential optional)
Scaling Analog Bandwidth
Individual customized units per channel for scaling, offset, DC - 500 kHz (-3 dB)
and units annotation. Vertical Sensitivity
5 mV - 20 V/div in a 1-2-5 sequence
POWER REQUIREMENTS Vertical Resolution
12 bits (0.025%)
Voltage and Frequency Accuracy
❏ 90 - 132 V ............................................. 45 - 400 Hz < ± 0.25 % Full Scale
❏ 180 - 264 V .............................................45 - 65 Hz Maximum Static Error (MSE)
Power Offset Error
150 W typical, 250 W maximum ❏ 40 - 160 mV range ...................... ± 0.4% Full Scale
❏ 0.4 - 160 V range ........................ ± 0.2% Full Scale
PHYSICAL Input Impedance
A2 Dimensions 1MΩ ± 0.5%, ≈ 50 pF
❏ Width ............................................. 15.4" (390 mm) Coupling
❏ Height .............................................. 7.1" (180 mm) DC, GND, AC (–3 dB at 1.5 Hz)
A3 ❏ Depth ............................................. 18.9" (480 mm) Position Range
Weight 0 - 100% of Full Scale
27 lb (12.2 kg) approximately Safe Overload
A4 ± 240 Volts RMS to 500 Hz, 360 V DC peak
Differential Inputs (optional) CMRR
ENVIRONMENTAL
❏ DC (5mV/div - 200mV/div ranges) ............. 72 dB
A5 Humidity (operating) ❏ 1 kHz ............................................................. 60 dB
Tested to IEC 68-2 Ca at 40 °C and 95% relative humidity ❏ 100 kHz ......................................................... 40 dB
(with disk 40 °C at 80%)
Temperature HORIZONTAL
❏ Operating ............................................. 0 °C - 50 °C
with disk .............................................. 5 °C - 45 °C Timebase Range (per channel)
❏ Non-operating ................................. –40 °C - 70 °C 1 MS/s to 0.25 S/s in 1, 2, 5 time/div. steps
with disk .......................................... –40 °C - 60 °C Timebase Accuracy
❏ All specifications guaranteed ............ 15 °C - 35 °C ± 0.01%
Safety Sweep Length (number of points)
EN61010-1 (EDC 1010) 500, 1 k, 2 k, 5 k, 10 k, 20k*, 50 k*
Vibration * via optional 50 k memory expansion
Random frequency to Mil STD 810D, 5 Hz to 500 Hz at 1 g External Clock
RMS, 15 minutes in each of 3 axes (0.3 g RMS with disk 500 kHz maximum
drive.)
EMC TRIGGER
Emission: EN50081-1, FCC pt15 class A Source
Immunity EN50082-1 Any channel, external, AC line
Slope
Specifications subject to change without notice. Positive, Negative, Dual
Pretrigger
0 - 100% of sweep in 0.2% steps
Trigger Delay
0 - 999 seconds
102
INTERNAL TRIGGER WAVEFORM ANALYSIS

Range Measurements
100% of input voltage range Up to 50 measurements can be made simultaneously. Stan-
Sensitivity dard pulse measurements can be performed using 10%, 50%
Variable noise reject from > 0.01 division and 90% points or by bounds defined by cursors or other
measurements. Measurements can be assigned to any trace
EXTERNAL TRIGGER and made with respect to ground or the cursor.
Scaling
Range Individual customized units per channel for scaling, offset,
12 Volts Full Scale (±6 Volts) and units annotation.
Sensitivity
Variable noise reject from > 20 mV ADVANCED ANALYSIS (Optional)
Coupling
AC, DC, 1 kHz LF reject, 15 kHz HF reject Filter
Bandwidth Six selectable stages of low pass filtering.
> 1 MHz Fast Fourier Transform (FFT)
Hanning or Rectangular window. Logarithmic or Linear
AUTO SETUP scaling of frequency and amplitude. Maximum FFT size
is 16 k data points.
Selects voltage range, timebase and trigger level for Histogram
repetitive signals. Produces a dsiplay of results accumulated from a mea-
Minimum input frequency: 10 Hz surement over a time period. Display update rates are 1 A2
to 100 seconds in 1, 2, 5, steps.
DISPLAY Graphing
Produces a display of measurement results against time
A3
Type
as a trace graph. Display range is ±999 x 1036 with
5.6" Color Liquid Crystal with over 9000 colors
Modes
individual settings for maximum and minimum. A4
Display update rates are 1 to 100 seconds in 1, 2, 5 steps.
Roll, Refresh, XY, Single-shot, Persistence
Display time is 50 x display update rate/division.
STORAGE
Integration/Differentiation A5
Calculates integral or derivative of a trace with select-
Hard Disk able scaling.
500 MB internal HD drive MS-DOS™ format XY Measurements
RAM Disk Up to 30 automatic measurements can be displayed.
45 kByte, battery backed Includes angle (deg/rad); ∆ Y, ∆ X (Volts); ∆ T (sec);
Floppy Disk (standard) area (Volts2); integrage (Volts2)
3.5", 720 kB/1.44 MB MS-DOS™ format
Files MEASUREMENTS AND SEQUENCES (Optional)
Waveform data and front panel setups
Custom Measurements
Vcross, Knee, Trigger, Sum, Delta, Multiply, Divide,
INTERFACES Average, Constant, Cos (), Log (), AntiLog ().
❏ Centronics, RS-423 Sequences
❏ GPIB / IEEE-488.2 (optional) Eight programmable sequences can be entered, incorpo-
rating 240 steps. Includes instrument control and menu
EXTERNAL PLOTTING selections. Program flow can be redirected dependent
upon measurement results. Full sequence editing includ-
Output in HP-GL or PCL3 via RS-423, Centronics, or ing printing results, wait function, timed pause and TTL
optional IEEE-488.2 ports with full annotation. event I/O.
103
POWER REQUIREMENTS
20 Integra 20
Voltage and Frequency
❏ 90 - 132 V .............................................45 - 400 Hz
❏ 180 - 264 V ............................................. 45 - 65 Hz
VERTICAL
Power
150 W typical, 250 W maximum Number of Channels
Four Differential (Single Ended optional)
PHYSICAL Analog Bandwidth
DC - 500 kHz (-3 dB)
Dimensions Vertical Sensitivity
❏ Width ............................................. 15.4" (390 mm) 5 mV - 20 V/div in a 1-2-5 sequence
❏ Height .............................................. 7.1" (180 mm) Vertical Resolution
❏ Depth ............................................. 18.9" (480 mm) 12 bits (0.025%)
Weight Accuracy
27 lb (12.2 kg) approximately < ± 0.25 % Full Scale
Maximum Static Error (MSE)
ENVIRONMENTAL Offset Error
Humidity (operating) ❏ 40 - 160 mV range ...................... ± 0.4% Full Scale
Tested to IEC 68-2 Ca at 40 °C and 95% relative humidity ❏ 0.4 - 160 V range ........................ ± 0.2% Full Scale
(with disk 40 °C at 80%) Input Impedance
A2 Temperature 1MΩ ± 0.5%, ≈ 50 pF
❏ Operating ............................................. 0 °C - 50 °C Coupling
with disk .............................................. 5 °C - 45 °C DC, GND, AC (–3 dB at 1.5 Hz)
A3 ❏ Non-operating ................................. –40 °C - 70 °C Position Range
with disk .......................................... –40 °C - 60 °C 0 - 100% of Full Scale
❏ All specifications guaranteed ............ 15 °C - 35 °C Safe Overload
A4 Safety 240 Volts RMS to 500 Hz, 360 V DC peak
EN61010-1 (EDC 1010) Differential Inputs CMRR
Vibration ❏ DC (5mV/div - 200mV/div ranges) ............ >72 dB
A5 Random frequency to Mil STD 810D, 5 Hz to 500 Hz at 1 g ❏ 1 kHz ........................................................... >60 dB
RMS, 15 minutes in each of 3 axes (0.3 g RMS with disk ❏ 100 kHz ....................................................... >40 dB
drive.)
EMC HORIZONTAL
Emission: EN50081-1, FCC pt15 class A Timebase Range (per channel)
Immunity EN50082-1 1 MS/s to 0.25 S/s in 1, 2, 5 time/div. steps
Timebase Accuracy
Specifications subject to change without notice. ± 0.01%
Sweep Length (number of points)
500 - 50 k* per channel in 5, 2, 1 steps
*Optional 200 k, 1 M, 2 M memory expansions
External Clock
500 kHz maximum
104
TRIGGER STORAGE
Source Hard Disk Drive (optional)
Any channel, external, AC line 500 MB internal HD drive MS-DOS™ format
Slope RAM Disk
Positive, Negative, Dual 45 kB standard, 1 MB optional, battery backed
Pretrigger Floppy Disk (standard)
0 - 100% of sweep in 0.2% steps 3.5", 720 kB/1.44 MB MS-DOS™ format
Trigger Delay Files
0 - 999 seconds Waveform data and front panel setups
INTERNAL TRIGGER INTERFACES

Range Centronics, RS-423, GPIB / IEEE-488.2 with 50 kB per
100% of input voltage range second transfer rate.
Sensitivity
Variable noise reject from > 0.01 division EXTERNAL PLOTTING I/O
Output in HP-GL or PCL3 via RS-423, Centronics, or
EXTERNAL TRIGGER
optional IEEE-488.2 ports with full annotation.
Range
12 Volts Full Scale (±6 Volts) INTERNAL THERMAL PLOTTER (Optional)
Sensitivity A2
Variable noise reject from > 20 mV Screen Plot
Coupling Plots screen data, including trace identification, range
AC, DC, 1 kHz LF reject, 15 kHz HF reject settings, time, data, and graticule. A3
Bandwidth Plot Size (WxH)
> 1 MHz 3.3" x 3.3" (85 mm x 85 mm)
Plot Buffer A4
Allows for Integra 20 operation while plotting.
ADVANCED TRIGGER MODES
Memory Plot
Pulse width, frequency/period, skew, missing event, divide 1 to 100 times screen width dependent on selected A5
by N, dual slope, combination, A delayed by B, B gates A memory length. Up to 200,000 points of memory can be
delayed by N, delay by N. plotted out in 400 screen widths.
AUTO SETUP WAVEFORM ANALYSIS

Selects voltage range, timebase and trigger level for Measurements
repetitive > 10 Hz signals. Up to 50 measurements can be made simultaneously.
Standard pulse measurements can be performed using
DISPLAY 10%, 50% and 90% points or by bounds defined by
cursors or other measurements. Measurements can be
Type assigned to any trace and made with respect to ground or
5.6" Color Liquid Crystal with over 9000 colors the cursor.
Modes Scaling
Roll, Refresh, XY, Single-shot, Persistence Individual customized units per channel for scaling,
offset, and units annotation.
105
ADVANCED ANALYSIS (Optional) PHYSICAL

Filter Dimensions
Six selectable stages of low pass filtering. ❏ Width ............................................. 15.4" (390 mm)
Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) ❏ Height .............................................. 7.1" (180 mm)
Hanning or Rectangular window. Logarithmic or Linear ❏ Depth ............................................. 23.2" (589 mm)
scaling of frequency and amplitude. Maximum FFT size Weight
is 16 k data points. 23 lb (10.4 kg) approximately
Histogram
Produces a dsiplay of results accumulated from a mea- ENVIRONMENTAL
surement over a time period. Display update rates are 1
to 100 seconds in 1, 2, 5, steps. Humidity (operating)
Graphing Tested to IEC 68-2 Ca at 40 °C and 95% relative
Produces a display of measurement results against time humidity (with disk 40 °C at 80%)
as a trace graph. Display range is ±999 x 1036 with Temperature
individual settings for maximum and minimum. ❏ Operating ............................................. 0 °C - 50 °C
Display update rates are 1 to 100 seconds in 1, 2, 5 steps. with disk .............................................. 5 °C - 45 °C
Display time is 50 x display update rate/division. ❏ Non-operating ................................. –40 °C - 70 °C
Integration/Differentiation with disk .......................................... –40 °C - 60 °C
Calculates integral or derivative of a trace with select- ❏ All specifications guaranteed ............ 15 °C - 35 °C
able scaling. Safety
XY Measurements EN61010-1 (EDC 1010)
A2 Vibration
Up to 30 automatic measurements can be displayed.
Includes angle (deg/rad); ∆ Y, ∆ X (Volts); ∆ T (sec); Random frequency to Mil STD 810D, 5 Hz to 500 Hz at
1 g RMS, 15 minutes in each of 3 axes (0.3 g RMS with
A3 area (Volts2); integrage (Volts2)
disk drive.)
Shock
MEASUREMENTS AND SEQUENCES (Optional)
A4 Operating: 3 shocks of 30 g peak, half-sine, 11 ms
Custom Measurements duration on each axis (10 g with drive)
Vcross, Knee, Trigger, Sum, Delta, Multiply, Divide, EMC
A5 Average, Constant, Cos (), Log (), AntiLog (). Emission: EN50081-1, FCC pt15 class A
Sequences Immunity EN50082-1
Eight programmable sequences can be entered, incorpo-
rating 240 steps. Includes instrument control and menu Specifications subject to change without notice.
selections. Program flow can be redirected dependent
ing printing results, wait function, timed pause and TTL
event I/O.
POWER REQUIREMENTS
❏ 90 - 132 V ............................................. 45 - 400 Hz
❏ 180 - 264 V .............................................45 - 65 Hz
Power
150 W typical, 250 W maximum
106
TRIGGER
40 Integra 40
Source
Any channel, external, AC line
Slope
VERTICAL
Positive, Negative, Dual
Number of Channels Pretrigger
Four Differential 0 - 100% of sweep in 0.2% steps
Analog Bandwidth Trigger Delay
DC - 5 MHz (-3 dB) 0 - 999 seconds
Vertical Sensitivity
5 mV - 20 V/div in a 1-2-5 sequence INTERNAL TRIGGER
Vertical Resolution
12 bits (0.025%) Range
Accuracy 100% of input voltage range
< ± 0.25 % Full Scale Sensitivity
Maximum Static Error (MSE) Variable noise reject from > 0.01 division
Gain Error
< ± 0.15 % Full Scale EXTERNAL TRIGGER
Offset Error Range
❏ 40 - 160 mV range ...................... ± 0.4% Full Scale 16 Volts Full Scale (±8 Volts)
❏ 0.4 - 160 V range ........................ ± 0.2% Full Scale Sensitivity A2
Input Impedance Variable noise reject from > 20 mV
1MΩ ± 0.5%, ≈ 50 pF Coupling
Coupling AC, DC, 1 kHz LF reject, 15 kHz HF reject A3
DC, GND, AC (–3 dB at 1.5 Hz) Bandwidth
Position Range > 1 MHz
0 - 100% of Full Scale A4
Safe Overload
240 Volts RMS to 500 Hz, 360 V DC peak
Differential Inputs CMRR Pulse width, frequency/period, skew, missing event, divide A5
❏ DC ............................................................... >72 dB by N, dual slope, combination, A delayed by B, B gates A
❏ 1 kHz ........................................................... >60 dB delayed by N, delay by N.
❏ 100 kHz ....................................................... >40 dB
AUTO SETUP
HORIZONTAL
Selects voltage range, timebase and trigger level for
Timebase Range (per channel) repetitive > 10 Hz signals.
20 MS/s to 0.25 S/s in 1, 2, 5 time/div. steps
Timebase Accuracy DISPLAY
± 0.01%
Sweep Length (number of points) Type
500 - 50 k* per channel in 5, 2, 1 steps 5.6" Color Liquid Crystal with over 9000 colors
*Optional 200 k, 1 M memory expansions Modes
External Clock Roll, Refresh, XY, Single-shot, Persistence
500 kHz maximum
107
STORAGE ADVANCED ANALYSIS (Optional)

Hard Disk Drive (optional) Filter
500 MB internal HD drive MS-DOS™ format Six selectable stages of low pass filtering.
RAM Disk Fast Fourier Transform (FFT)
45 kB standard, 1 MB optional, battery backed Hanning or Rectangular window. Logarithmic or Linear
Floppy Disk (optional) scaling of frequency and amplitude. Maximum FFT size
3.5", 720 kB/1.44 MB MS-DOS™ format is 16 k data points.
Files Histogram
Waveform data and front panel setups Produces a dsiplay of results accumulated from a mea-
surement over a time period. Display update rates are 1
INTERFACES to 100 seconds in 1, 2, 5, steps.
Graphing
Centronics, RS-423, GPIB / IEEE-488.2 with 50 kB per Produces a display of measurement results against time
second transfer rate. as a trace graph. Display range is ±999 x 1036 with
individual settings for maximum and minimum.
EXTERNAL PLOTTING I/O Display update rates are 1 to 100 seconds in 1, 2, 5 steps.
Output in HP-GL or PCL3 via RS-423, Centronics, or Display time is 50 x display update rate/division.
optional IEEE-488.2 ports with full annotation. Integration/Differentiation
Calculates integral or derivative of a trace with select-
able scaling.
INTERNAL THERMAL PLOTTER (Optional)
A2 XY Measurements
Screen Plot Up to 30 automatic measurements can be displayed.
Plots screen data, including trace identification, range Includes angle (deg/rad); ∆ Y, ∆ X (Volts); ∆ T (sec);
A3 settings, time, data, and graticule. area (Volts2); integrage (Volts2)
Plot Size (WxH)
3.3" x 3.3" (85 mm x 85 mm) MEASUREMENTS AND SEQUENCES (Optional)
A4 Plot Buffer
Allows for Integra 40 operation while plotting. Custom Measurements
Memory Plot Vcross, Knee, Trigger, Sum, Delta, Multiply, Divide,
A5 1 to 100 times screen width dependent on selected Average, Constant, Cos (), Log (), AntiLog ().
memory length. Up to 200,000 points of memory can be Sequences
plotted out in 400 screen widths. Eight programmable sequences can be entered, incorpo-
WAVEFORM ANALYSIS
Measurements ing printing results, wait function, timed pause and TTL
Up to 50 measurements can be made simultaneously. event I/O.
Standard pulse measurements can be performed using
10%, 50% and 90% points or by bounds defined by POWER REQUIREMENTS
cursors or other measurements. Measurements can be
assigned to any trace and made with respect to ground or Voltage and Frequency
the cursor. ❏ 90 - 132 V ............................................. 45 - 400 Hz
Scaling ❏ 180 - 264 V ............................................. 45 - 65 Hz
Individual customized units per channel for scaling, Power
offset, and units annotation. 150 W typical, 250 W maximum
108
PHYSICAL
Dimensions
60 Integra 60
❏ Width ............................................. 15.4" (390 mm)
❏ Height .............................................. 7.1" (180 mm)
❏ Depth ............................................. 23.2" (589 mm) VERTICAL
Weight Number of Channels
23 lb (10.4 kg) approximately Four Single Ended
Analog Bandwidth
ENVIRONMENTAL DC - 200 MHz (-3 dB), Selectable bandwidth limits:
100 MHz, 20 MHz, 1 MHz
Humidity (operating)
Vertical Sensitivity
Tested to IEC 68-2 Ca at 40 °C and 95% relative
2 mV - 5 V/div in a 1-2-5 sequence
humidity (with disk 40 °C at 80%)
Vertical Resolution
Temperature
8 bits (0.4%)
❏ Operating ............................................. 0 °C - 50 °C
Accuracy
with disk .............................................. 5 °C - 45 °C
2%
❏ Non-operating ................................. –40 °C - 70 °C
Input Impedance
with disk .......................................... –40 °C - 60 °C
Selectable per channel: 1MΩ, 10pF, or 50Ω
❏ All specifications guaranteed ............ 15 °C - 35 °C
Coupling
Safety
DC, GND, AC (–3 dB at 4 Hz)
EN61010-1 (EDC 1010)
Vibration
Position Range A2
0 - 100% of Full Scale
Random frequency to Mil STD 810D, 5 Hz to 500 Hz at
Safe Overload
1 g RMS, 15 minutes in each of 3 axes (0.3 g RMS with
disk drive.)
1 MΩ protected to 400VDC peak A3
Input Offset Range (Accuracy ±2%)
Shock
❏ 2mV/div - 50 mV/div ...................................... 0.5V
Operating: 3 shocks of 30 g peak, half-sine, 11 ms
❏ 100 mV/div - 0.5 V/div ...................................... 5V A4
duration on each axis (10 g with drive)
❏ 1V/div - 5V/div ................................................ 50V
EMC
Emission: EN50081-1, FCC pt15 class A A5
Immunity EN50082-1 HORIZONTAL
Timebase Range (maximum sample rates per channel)
Specifications subject to change without notice. ❏ Transient ................................................... 100 Ms/s
❏ Repetitive (ETS) ........................................... 5 Gs/s
Timebase Accuracy
± 0.01%
Sweep Length (number of points)
500 - 50 k* per channel in 5, 2, 1 steps
*Optional 200 k, 1 M, 2 M memory expansions
External Clock
500 kHz maximum
109
TRIGGER INTERFACES
Source Centronics, RS-423, GPIB / IEEE-488.2 with 50 kB per
Any channel, external, AC line second transfer rate.
Slope
Positive, Negative, Band EXTERNAL PLOTTING I/O
Coupling
AC, DC, HF reject >15 kHZ, TV sync separator for Output in HP-GL or PCL3 via RS-423, Centronics, or
NTSC, PAL or SECAM optional IEEE-488.2 ports with full annotation.
Pretrigger
0 - 100% of sweep in 0.2% steps INTERNAL THERMAL PLOTTER (Optional)
Trigger Delay Screen Plot
0 - 399 seconds Plots screen data, including trace identification, range
settings, time, data, and graticule.
INTERNAL TRIGGER Plot Size (WxH)
Range 3.3" x 3.3" (85 mm x 85 mm)
100% of input voltage range Plot Buffer
Allows for Integra 60 operation while plotting.
Memory Plot
EXTERNAL TRIGGER
1 to 100 times screen width dependent on selected
Range memory length. Up to 200,000 points of memory can be
A2 10 Volts Full Scale (±5 Volts) plotted out in 400 screen widths.
Bandwidth
200 MHz WAVEFORM ANALYSIS
A3
Measurements
Up to 50 measurements can be made simultaneously.
A4 Pulse width, frequency/period, skew, missing event, divide Standard pulse measurements can be performed using
by N, dual slope, combination, A delayed by B, B gates A 10%, 50% and 90% points or by bounds defined by
delayed by N, delay by N, TV. cursors or other measurements. Measurements can be
A5 assigned to any trace and made with respect to ground or
AUTO SETUP the cursor.
Scaling
Selects voltage range, timebase and trigger level for Individual customized units per channel for scaling,
repetitive > 10 Hz signals. offset, and units annotation.
DISPLAY
Type
5.6" Color Liquid Crystal with over 9000 colors
Modes
Roll, Refresh, XY, Single-shot, Persistence
STORAGE
Hard Disk Drive (optional)
500 MB internal HD drive MS-DOS™ format
RAM Disk
45 kB standard, 1 MB optional, battery backed
Floppy Disk (optional)
3.5", 720 kB/1.44 MB MS-DOS™ format
Files
Waveform data and front panel setups
110
ADVANCED ANALYSIS (Optional) ENVIRONMENTAL

Filter Humidity (operating)
Six selectable stages of low pass filtering. Tested to IEC 68-2 Ca at 40 °C and 95% relative
Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) humidity (with disk 40 °C at 80%)
Hanning or Rectangular window. Logarithmic or Linear Temperature
scaling of frequency and amplitude. Maximum FFT size ❏ Operating ............................................. 0 °C - 50 °C
is 16 k data points. with disk .............................................. 5 °C - 45 °C
Histogram ❏ Non-operating ................................. –40 °C - 70 °C
Produces a dsiplay of results accumulated from a mea- with disk .......................................... –40 °C - 60 °C
surement over a time period. Display update rates are 1 ❏ All specifications guaranteed ............ 15 °C - 35 °C
to 100 seconds in 1, 2, 5, steps. Safety
Graphing EN61010-1 (EDC 1010)
Produces a display of measurement results against time Vibration
as a trace graph. Display range is ±999 x 1036 with Random frequency to Mil STD 810D, 5 Hz to 500 Hz at
individual settings for maximum and minimum. 1 g RMS, 15 minutes in each of 3 axes (0.3 g RMS with
Display update rates are 1 to 100 seconds in 1, 2, 5 steps. disk drive.)
Display time is 50 x display update rate/division. Shock
Integration/Differentiation Operating: 3 shocks of 30 g peak, half-sine, 11 ms
Calculates integral or derivative of a trace with select- duration on each axis (10 g with drive)
able scaling. EMC
XY Measurements Emission: EN50081-1, FCC pt15 class A A2
Up to 30 automatic measurements can be displayed. Immunity EN50082-1
Includes angle (deg/rad); ∆ Y, ∆ X (Volts); ∆ T (sec);
area (Volts2); integrage (Volts2) Specifications subject to change without notice. A3
MEASUREMENTS AND SEQUENCES (Optional)
A4
Custom Measurements
Vcross, Knee, Trigger, Sum, Delta, Multiply, Divide,
Average, Constant, Cos (), Log (), AntiLog (). A5
Sequences
Eight programmable sequences can be entered, incorpo-
ing printing results, wait function, timed pause and TTL
event I/O.
POWER REQUIREMENTS
❏ 90 - 132 V ............................................. 45 - 400 Hz
❏ 180 - 264 V ............................................. 45 - 65 Hz
Power
150 W typical, 250 W maximum
PHYSICAL
Dimensions
❏ Width ............................................. 15.4" (390 mm)
❏ Height .............................................. 7.1" (180 mm)
❏ Depth ............................................. 23.2" (589 mm)
Weight
23 lb (10.4 kg) approximately
111
Appendix 3: Waveform File Data Type

Specifications "Integer" means an ASCII whole number, for example "2"
This chapter contains the Time Domain Waveform Data or "262144." Note that the values are not limited to a 16-bit
Fields descriptions. It also includes the Normalization range: the "Time" field, in milliseconds since midnight, may
Equations. contain a number as large as 89,400,000.
A Time Domain file is identified by a ".WFT" extension. "Character" means ASCII text, for example "V" or "Test
#12."
File Header
"Float" means an ASCII number in scientific notation, for
The file header size is determined by the value entered in the example "5.0000000E-6."
field "Header_Size." The individual file header fields are
fixed in length and are ASCII alphanumeric strings, each Actual Data
terminated by a null (00) byte.
The actual data (raw data) follows immediately after the file
The simplest file, containing a single waveform with a single header. The data is in binary format. Please note that the data
timebase, will have a header of 1538 bytes. A file containing type (number of bytes per point, and byte sex) are described
multiple waveform segments or multiple timebases will in the file header.
expand the header length as needed.
Normally data is in a 16-bit integer range from -32768 to
+32767, with the low byte appearing first.
A2 All fields are left justified ASCII character strings, followed
by a null byte, followed by spaces if needed to fill the allotted
space. If a particular field is not used, its first byte is a null Raw data is converted into time and voltage values by the
calculations shown in Figure A3.1.
A3 byte.
Since the header contains only ASCII characters and ends

A4 with a CONTROL-Z character, the header text can be
conveniently viewed on a PC screen by using the MS-DOS
"TYPE" command, for example "TYPE WAVE0001.WFT
A5 <Return>."
Time = ((point# * HORIZONTAL_NORM) + HORIZONTAL_ZERO) * USER_HORIZONTAL NORM +

USER_HORIZONTAL_ZERO
point# = Represents the n-th point in a sweep.
HORIZONTAL_NORM = Time per point, in seconds.
HORIZONTAL_ZERO = Trigger to 1st point, in seconds.
USER_HORIZONTAL_NORM = User defined multiplier, unitless (normally 1)
USER_HORIZONTAL_ZERO = User defined time offset, in seconds (normally 0)
Volts = ((data - VERTICAL_ZERO) * VERTICAL_NORM) * USER_VERTICAL_NORM + USER_VERTICAL ZERO

data = Raw digitizer data (-32,768 through 32,767)
VERTICAL_ZERO = Absolute zero reference from the ADC
VERTICAL_NORM = Voltage per level
USER_VERTICAL_NORM = User defined multiplier (normally 1)
USER_VERTICAL ZERO = User defined offset in volts (normally 0)
Figure A3.1 Normalization Equations
112
Time Domain Waveform Data Fields
Max. ASCII
Offset Size Field Name Field Description
(Bytes) Data Type
0 2 Nic_id0 Integer CPU type ID (byte sex) 1 = VAX, 2 = 68000, 3 = Intel:

normally 3
2 2 Nic_id1 Integer Nicolet division indicator: always 2
4 2 Nic_id2 Integer Nicolet file format: 1 = Time domain, 2 = Frequency domain
6 2 User_id Integer User ID
8 12 Header_size Integer Length of file header in bytes
20 12 File_size Integer Length of entire file in bytes
32 12 File format version Integer Version of file format

A2
44 81 Waveform title Character Waveform title (Note 1)
125 3 Date_year Integer Date of trigger of segment #1 - year A3

128 3 Date_month Integer Date of trigger of segment #1 - month
A4
131 3 Date_day Integer Date of trigger of segment #1 - day
134 12 Time Integer Time of trigger of segment #1 - msec since midnight A5

146 12 Data_Count Integer Total number of data points
158 12 Vertical_zero Integer Data value at which the voltage value is 0.00 volts -VREF
170 24 Vertical_norm Float Voltage magnitude between levels - VNORM
194 24 User_vertical_zero Float User voltage offset
218 24 User_vertical_norm Float User units per volt
242 11 User_vertical_label Char User vertical label: default = "V"
253 24 User_horizontal_zero Float User time offset
277 24 User_horizontal _norm Float User seconds per unit
301 11 User_horizontal_label Character User horizontal label: default = "S"
Table A3.1 Time Domain Data Fields and Descriptions
Note 1: Not currently used with your system.
113
Max. ASCII
(Bytes) Data Type
312 129 User_Notes Character Note field, additional information
441 196 Audit Character Audit array of all calculations
637 21 Nicolet_Digitizer_Type Character Nicolet digitizer description
658 3 Bytes_per_data_point Integer Amount of bytes to store 1 data point: normally 2
661 3 Resolution Integer Number of active bits in a data point
664 81 Forward_link Character Pathname/file following in time the current file (Note 1).
745 81 Backward_link Character Pathname/file preceding in time the current file (Note 1)
826 3 Process flag Integer Process Flag - # of memory altering math functions performed
829 3 Data compression Integer Type of data compression used on raw data: 0 = none
A2 832 12 Number of segments Integer Number of segments
844 12 Length of each segment Integer Length of each segment

A3
856 12 Number of timebases Integer Number of timebases per segment
A4 868 156 Reserved N/A N/A Reserved for Nicolet internal use only
1024 12 Length of zone 1 Integer Length in points of zone 1

A5
1036 24 Horiz. norm. zone 1 Float Time between data points (tpp) - HNORM
1060 24 Horiz. zero zone 1 Float Time of 1st point in zone 1 with respect to the trigger
1084 12 Length of zone 2 Integer Length in points of zone 2 (Note 1)
1096 24 Horiz. norm. zone 2 Float Time between data points (tpp) - HNORM (Note 1)
1120 24 Horiz. zero zone 2 Float Time of 1st point in zone 2 with respect to the trigger (Note 1)
1144 12 Length of zone 3 Integer Length in points of zone 3 (Note 1)
1156 24 Horiz. norm. zone 3 Float Time between data points (tpp) - HNORM (Note 1)
1180 24 Horiz. zero zone 3 Float Time of 1st point in zone 3 with respect to the trigger (Note 1)
1204 332 Reserved N/A N/A Reserved for Nicolet internal use only
Table A3.1 Time Domain Data Fields, continued
Note 1: Not currently used with your instrument.
114
Max. ASCII
(Bytes) Data Type
1536 ( Note 2) 24 Segment #2 HDELTA Float Time value of 1st point relative to time
of 1st point of seg. #1
of 1st point of seg. #1 A2
1536 + (24 * (n-2)) 24 Segment #n HDELTA Float Time value of 1st point relative to time
A5
Header_Size - 2 1 End of HDELTA's Null
Header_size - 1 1 End of readable file Control Z End of readable data - Raw data follows
Header_size Data _ Count Start of raw data Raw Binary data: normally 16-bit words in
two's compliment arranged in
low byte/high byte order
File_size - 1 Data _ Count *

Bytes_per_data_point End of raw data
Table A3.1 Time Domain Data Fields, continued
Note 2: These fields are present only in multi-waveform files.
115
Appendix 4: Interfacing the DSO to an 4. To test the interface and connections the following short
IBM-PC via the RS423 (RS232) BASIC program can be run:
There are a number of points worth noting when interfacing 10 OPEN “COM1:9600,N,8,1,DS0,LF” AS #1
the DSO to an IBM-PC or AT via the RS423 port. 20 PRINT #1,”CHAN1:COUP?”
30 INPUT #1,X$
1. The cable should be wired as follows: 40 PRINT X$
DSO IBM-PC DSO IBM-AT 50 CLOSE #1
9 way 25 way 9 way 25 way This uses the COM1 port on the IBM, and sets up the
male female male female interface to 9600 baud, no parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit,
TXD 2 ---------3 RXD TXD 2 --------- 2 RXD no DSR-DTR handshaking and Line Feed as a termina-
RXD 3 ---------2 TXD RXD 3 --------- 3 TXD tor. The program then requests the vertical coupling of
GND 5 ---------7 GND GND 5 --------- 5 GND channel 1, inputs the response from the DSO, and prints
CTS 7 ---------4 RTS CTS 7 --------- 7 RTS it on the screen. For example if channel 1 is AC coupled
RTS 8 ---------5 CTS RTS 8 --------- 8 CTS the program should print CHAN1:COUP AC, and leave
the instrument in RS423 Remote Mode.
2. In most cases Echo should be OFF (see note below).
Note: This is only for use with dumb terminals, and echoes
back every character as it is received. This is
unnecessary when using a PC as a controller, and
A2 can cause problems if the software is not expecting to
receive the echoed characters.
A3
A4
A5
116
Appendix 5: Connector Pinouts and External Clock

Driver Circuits The maximum input frequency is 5 MHz and in refresh
mode the DSO will function perfectly at up to 5 MHz.
However, the maximum recommended frequency for the
Driving the External Clock Input
external clock in roll mode is 100 kHz. Limiting external
The external clock input is a TTL level input. The input is clock to this frequency in roll mode ensures that the DSO
designed to expect a drive signal from bus and line drivers behaves in the same way as when it is using its own internal
such as the 74XX244. timebase clock.
For low frequency operation, i.e. below 100 kHz, it can be
driven by all TTL logic families using up to approximately +5 V on I/O Connector
a 1 meter line length.
At frequencies above 100 kHz, it is recommended that the The +5 V rail available on the Miscellaneous I/O connector
input is driven with the circuit shown below to ensure correct is internally connected to the +5 V supply through a 37 Ω
operation. resistance. This voltage will therefore be capable of power-
ing about 3 or 4 TTL devices so that a simple Clock or
Trigger generator circuit can be powered by the instrument.
A2
External drive circuitry DSO
A3
’244
100
A4
Twisted pair
100 turns/meter
(30 turns/foot) 100n A5
Figure A5a Typical Drive Circuitry
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 9 8 7 6
Pin Signal Description

Pin Signal Pin Signal 2 TXD Transmit Data
1 Spare 9 Sample Clock Output 3 RXD Receive Data
2 Spare 10 Trigger Output 5 GND Signal Ground
3 Event In 11 Spare 7 CTS Clear to Send
4 Event Out 12 Ground 8 RTS Request to Send
5 Spare 13 +5V
6 External Clock Input 14 Spare
7 Ground 15 Spare
8 Spare
Figure A5b Miscellaneous I/O Connector Figure A5c RS423 Interface Connector
117
5. Slide the cover back over the rear of the Integra. A gasket
Appendix 6: Disassembly Procedures is used for emission protection that may pull loose from
CAUTION Always Use Proper ASD (Anti-Static the front panel assembly. Make certain the this is not
Discharge) Precautions when working with damaged and that it is put properly back in place.
the Integra.
6. Repeat steps 5 through 1 in order to place the cover
This section is designed to explain to an experienced techni- assembly back into place.
cian how to isolate problems to the assembly or field
replaceable level. Once you have identified the defective
assembly, you can easily exchange, repair or replace it by Fan Removal Procedure
contacting your nearest Nicolet Technologies authorized 1. Remove the cover assembly.
service center.
2. View the Integra from it’s right side.
Note: Performance verifications tests should be performed
after completion of any repair or board exchange. 3. Remove the three nylon screws that are holding the fan
Out of specification performance may require assembly in place and set aside.
calibration by your nearest authorized Nicolet 4. Disconnect the 2 pin power connector from the Integra
Technologies Service Center. Processor board.
You will need to have a thorough understanding of each of 5. Repeat steps 4 - 1 in order to install the new fan.
the assemblies and how they work together to accurately
diagnose problems and isolate faults.
GPIB Board Removal Procedure
Integra Disassembly 1. Remove the cover assembly.

2. Remove the two screws on the Integra rear panel that
hold the GPIB assembly in place. The GPIB assembly
Overview
includes the GPIB board and the mother board that it is
The Integra enclosure has three basic components; the attached to.
chassis, the front panel assembly and the cover. Sub assem-
3. Remove the three screws that hold in the top side support
blies are accessed by removing the cover and if necessary,
bracket.
the front panel assembly.
4. The top bracket has to be removed in order to remove the
Before removing any assembly, read the entire removal
entire GPIB board assembly.
procedure. You will generally have to follow the removal
A6 procedures in the order presented to replace an assembly.
Processor Board Removal Procedure
A7 Cover Removal Procedure CAUTION USE PROPER ASD PRECAUTIONS!!!!
To gain access to most sub-assemblies in the Integra, it is 1. Remove the cover assembly
first necessary to remove the Cover Assembly. This is 2. Remove the eight screws that hold the processor board to
performed by:
the frame assembly.
1. You will need two Phillips screwdrivers, a larger and a
3. Disconnect the 12 conductor power supply cable from
smaller. the processor board.
2. From the rear of the Integra, remove the four screws 4. Disconnect the small mylar ribbon cable connecting the
inside the back rubber bumpers. Be careful not to lose the front panel to the processor board. Carefully lift the two
washers used in the screws. white tabs on both sides of the connector and pull the
3. There are six additional screws on the rear panel that cable out.
need to be removed. They are located on the outside 5. Disconnect the small mylar ribbon cable connecting the
edges of the cover and near the AC input connector. video display to the processor board. Carefully pull this
4. Carefully set the Integra on its face. (It is recommended
that the handle be down in order to protect the front panel
from damage, however, this will make the unit unstable)
118
cable up by grasping the cable near the connector with 5. Remove the screw that connects the ADC Board assem-
your thumb and fore finger and pulling straight up. There bly to the front panel.
is no release on the connector.
6. Remove the screw that connects the frame support bracket
6. Use a 3/16” nut driver to remove the six screw standoffs on the top side of the frame assembly to the front panel.
for “Misc I/O, RS423 and Parallel I/O” on the rear panel
7. Remove the screw that connects the video display as-
of the Integra.
sembly to the front panel.
7. Lift the board out, making certain that no cables or wires
8. Disconnect the from panel mylar ribbon cable from the
are still connected to the board.
processor board assembly by carefully lifting the two
8. Repeat instructions 7 through 1 to install the new proces- white eject tabs on either side of the cable. Carefully
sor board assembly. grasp the cable with your thumb and fore finger and lift
straight up making certain that no part of the cable is
damaged.
ADC Board Removal Procedure
9. Lift the front panel assembly away from the frame.
CAUTION USE PROPER ASD PRECAUTIONS!!!!
10. Repeat steps 9 through 1 to install the new front panel
1. Remove the cover assembly.
assembly.
2. Remove the green and yellow power switch cable from
the ADC board.
Power Supply Removal Procedure
3. Remove the 12 conductor power supply cable from the
ADC board.
4. Remove the eight screws that are holding the ADC board
to the mainframe assembly. 2. Stand the Integra up so that you are viewing the instru-
ment with the ADC board facing you.
5. Remove the one screw that holds the ADC board to the
front panel assembly. 3. Remove the three screws holding the power supply in
place.
6. Loosen the two nuts on the rear panel BNC’s and ground
lug and pull the BNC’s back through the frame with their 4. Remove the screw along the left side of the unit connect-
white/black twisted pair wires. ing the frame assembly to the power supply.
7. Carefully pry the 96 pin connector that allows the ADC 5. Disconnect the 12 pin power supply cable from the ADC
board to interface to the Processor board away. board assembly and the Processor board assembly. A6
8. Carefully pull the board away from the frame making 6. Remove the power supply.
certain that no wires or screws are still connected.
7. Repeat steps 6 through 1 to install the new power supply A7
9. Repeat steps 8 through 1 in order to install the new ADC assembly.
board assembly.
Front Panel Removal Procedure

2. Move the handle position so that it does not interfere with
the screws located by the handle release button.
3. NOTE: Five screws need to be remove in this procedure.
There are four different styles of screws. Use caution
when putting the screws back into place that you do not
try and force the wrong style or size of screw into place.
4. Remove the two screws mentioned in step 2 above.
119
Appendix 7: Integra Series LRU Lists Integra 15 and Integra 20

PART NO. DESCRIPTION
011-940900 BRKT/INTEGRA FDD DRIVE
Integra 10 011-941100 BRKT/INTEGRA TIE BAR RIGHT
011-941200 BRKT/INTEGRA TIE BAR CENTER
PART NO. DESCRIPTION 011-943101 BRKT/INTEGRA OPTION 1
011-940900 BRKT/INTEGRA FDD DRIVE 017-919800 LABEL/SERIAL NUMBER, NARROW
011-941100 BRKT/INTEGRA TIE BAR RIGHT 017-920400 LABEL/TRIANGLE EXCLAMATION
011-941200 BRKT/INTEGRA TIE BAR CENTER 020-901502 CHASSIS INTEGRA 10 & 20
020-901502 CHASSIS INTEGRA 10 & 20 035-903500 BUTT/INTEGRA ROCKER
024-057900 CON/ 2F HRL ID C TL R 035-903600 BUTT KEYMAT/INTEGRA
035-903500 BUTT/INTEGRA ROCKER 035-9037E0 BUTT/INTEGRA KEYMAT MODIFIED
035-903600 BUTT KEYMAT/INTEGRA 035-903900 BUTT/INTEGRA REC GREY
035-903900 BUTT/INTEGRA REC GREY 035-904000 BUTT/INTEGRA HANDLE RELEASE
035-904000 BUTT/INTEGRA HANDLE RELEASE 042-9174E1 COVER/INTEGRA REAR BLANK 3-WAY
042-916800 COVER/INTEGRA PLAIN 042-917500 COVER/INTEGRA REAR BLANK SINGLE
042-9174E1 PNR COVER/INTEGRA REAR BLANK 3-WAY 042-918002 COVER/INTEGRA SIG COND PORTS
042-917500 COVER/INTEGRA REAR BLANK SINGLE 044-923300 SHIELD/INTEGRA ANALOG COMP SIDE
042-918002 COVER/INTEGRA SIG COND PORTS 044-923400 SHIELD/INTEGRA ANALOG SOLD SIDE
044-923300 SHIELD/INTEGRA ANALOG COMP SIDE 045-902200 KNOB/INTEGRA ENCODER SMALL
044-923400 SHIELD/INTEGRA ANALOG SOLD SIDE 045-902300 KNOB/INTEGRA ENCODER RAW
045-902200 KNOB/INTEGRA ENCODER SMALL 049-903000 HANDLE/INTEGRA PARTS KIT
045-902300 KNOB/INTEGRA ENCODER RAW 055-900500 SPRING/INTEGRA HANDLE
049-903000 HANDLE/INTEGRA PARTS KIT 056-901600 BASE/INTEGRA HANDLE
051-902200 BUMP/INTEGRA FOOT 068-940400 ESC/INTEGRA 20 MAIN
055-900500 SPRING/INTEGRA HANDLE 068-940600 ESC/INTEGRA BNC FDD DIFF
056-901600 BASE/INTEGRA HANDLE 068-941100 ESC/INTEGRA 20 LOGO
061-900300 TERM/INTEGRA SNALE OXLEY 14914 068-941202 PAN/INTEGRA FRONT
068-940800 ESC/INTEGRA BNC BLANKING S/E 068-941300 PAN/INTEGRA FRONT MOULDING
068-941202 PAN/INTEGRA FRONT 068-942400 PAN/INTEGRA 20 REAR
068-941300 PAN/INTEGRA FRONT MOULDING 068-943200 ESC/INTEGRA 10/20 MAIN SET
068-942400 PAN/INTEGRA 20 REAR 068-943300 ESC/INTEGRA 10/20 LOGO SET
068-943300 ESC/INTEGRA 10/20 LOGO SET 072-900200 FAN/12V DC 80 CFM 120MM X 32MM
068-943500 PAN/INTEGRA 10 REAR 085-718300 PROBE/X1M12
072-900200 FAN/12V DC 80 CFM 120MM X 32MM 085-955900 CBL/INTEGRA POWER SWITCH
085-718300 PROBE/X1M12 085-956100 CBL/INTEGRA FDD FLEX
085-955900 CBL/INTEGRA POWER SWITCH 085-956200 CBL/INTEGRA DISPLAY FLEX
085-956100 CBL/INTEGRA FDD FLEX 085-957300 CBL/BNC TO CHABBIN 8"
085-956200 CBL/INTEGRA DISPLAY FLEX 085-999999 CORD/POWER
A6 085-957300
093-721400
CBL/BNC TO CHABBIN 8"
FASTNR/SCR LOCK D60-0187-03
093-901400
113-902200
FASTNR/INTEGRA KEYMAT RETAINER
PWR SPPLY/INTEGRA 250W
093-901400 FASTNR/INTEGRA KEYMAT RETAINER 116-904600 SUPP/INTEGRA CARD SIDE
113-902200 PWR SPPLY/INTEGRA 250W 116-904700 SUPP/INTEGRA CARD MOTHERBD
A7 116-904600 SUPP/INTEGRA CARD SIDE 129-906900 FRAME/INTEGRA FRONT
129-906900 FRAME/INTEGRA FRONT 163-900500 DISPLAY INTEGRA
163-900500 DISPLAY INTEGRA 164-901800 GRAT/INTEGRA DISPLAY COLOR
164-901700 GRAT/INTEGRA DISPLAY MONO 222-918400 FLOPPY DRIVE TEAC FD-05HF
222-918400 FLOPPY DRIVE TEAC FD-05HF 415-035400 INTEGRA PROCESSOR TESTED ASSY
269-930500 SPLINE/INTEGRA REMOTE COMMAND 415-035500 INTEGRA FRONT PANEL TESTED ASSY
415-034100 INTEGRA ANALOG S/E TESTED 415-035600 INTEGRA ANALOG “DIFF” TESTED
415-035400 INTEGRA PROCESSOR TESTED ASSY 415-035700 INTEGRA MOTHER BOARD TESTED
415-035500 INTEGRA FRONT PANEL TESTED ASSY 415-035800 INTEGRA OPTION BOARD TESTED
415-035700 INTEGRA MOTHER BOARD TESTED 426-004005 SOFT/PC UTILITIES V1.9
415-035800 INTEGRA OPTION BOARD TESTED 445-013700 INTEGRA FDD OPTION ASSY
426-004005 SOFT/PC UTILITIES V1.9 445-014700 INTEGRA 20 FRT PANEL DIFF W/FDD
445-014200 INTEGRA 10 FRT PANEL SE W/O FDD 619-006700 MAN SET/INTEGRA OPERATION
619-006700 MAN SET/INTEGRA OPERATION 619-007200 MAN SET/INTEGRA REMOTE COMMAND
619-007200 MAN SET/INTEGRA REMOTE COMMAND 645-001900 INTEGRA 20 STANDARD FRAME ASSY
645-001900 INTEGRA 20 STANDARD FRAME ASSY
645-002400 INTEGRA 10 FRAME ASSY
120
Integra 40 Integra 60
PART NO. DESCRIPTION PART NO. DESCRIPTION
986A0072A INTEGRA 40 CONFIGURABLE SYSTEM 011-940900 BRKT/INTEGRA FDD DRIVE
986A0072 INTEGRA 40 STANDARD SYSTEM 011-941100 BRKT/INTEGRA TIE BAR RIGHT
645-002900 INTEGRA 40 LONG MEMORY FRAME 011-941200 BRKT/INTEGRA TIE BAR CENTER
645-002800 INTEGRA 40 SHORT MEMORY FRAME 011-943101 BRKT/INTEGRA OPTION 1
619-007200 MAN SET/INTEGRA REMOTE COMMAND 020-9017E0 CHASSIS/INTEGRA 60
619-006700 MAN SET/INTEGRA OPERATION 035-903500 BUTT/INTEGRA ROCKER
445-016000 INTEGRA KEYMAT MODIFIED 035-903600 BUTT KEYMAT/INTEGRA
445-015900 INTEGRA 40 FRONT PANEL 035-9037E0 BUTT/INTEGRA KEYMAT MODIFIED
426-004005 SOFT/PC UTILITIES V1.9 035-903900 BUTT/INTEGRA REC GREY
415-041000 INTEGRA ACQUIS. W/50K TESTED BD 035-904000 BUTT/INTEGRA HANDLE RELEASE
415-040600 INTEGRA ACQUIS. W/1MEG TESTED 042-916800 COVER/INTEGRA PLAIN
415-040000 INTEGRA 40 ANALOG TESTED BOARD 042-9174E1 COVER/INTEGRA REAR BLANK 3-WAY
415-039300 INTEGRA CPU W DRAM TESTED ASSY 042-917500 COVER/INTEGRA REAR BLANK SINGLE
415-035800 INTEGRA OPTION BOARD TESTED 045-902200 KNOB/INTEGRA ENCODER SMALL
415-035700 INTEGRA MOTHER BOARD TESTED 045-902300 KNOB/INTEGRA ENCODER RAW
415-035500 INTEGRA FRONT PANEL TESTED ASSY 049-903000 HANDLE/INTEGRA PARTS KIT
415-035400 INTEGRA PROCESSOR TESTED ASSY 055-900500 SPRING/INTEGRA HANDLE
222-918400 FLOPPY DRIVE TEAC FD-05HF 056-901600 BASE/INTEGRA HANDLE
164-901800 GRAT/INTEGRA DISPLAY COLOR 068-941202 PAN/INTEGRA FRONT
163-900500 DISPLAY INTEGRA 068-941300 PAN/INTEGRA FRONT MOULDING
116-904700 SUPP/INTEGRA CARD MOTHERBD 068-9439E0 PAN/INTEGRA 40/60 REAR
116-904600 SUPP/INTEGRA CARD SIDE 072-900200 FAN/12V DC 80 CFM 120MM X 32MM
113-902200 PWR SPPLY/INTEGRA 250W 085-718400 PROBE/X10M12
093-901400 FASTNR/INTEGRA KEYMAT RETAINER 085-955900 CBL/INTEGRA POWER SWITCH
093-721400 FASTNR/SCR LOCK D60-0187-03 085-956100 CBL/INTEGRA FDD FLEX
085-999999 CORD/POWER 085-956200 CBL/INTEGRA DISPLAY FLEX
085-959600 “CBL/30 CONDUCTOR 11”” FPC” 085-999999 CORD/POWER
085-956200 “CBL/25 COND 12”” FPC” 093-901400 FASTNR/INTEGRA KEYMAT RETAINER
085-956100 “CBL/26 COND 16”” FPC” 113-902200 PWR SPPLY/INTEGRA 250W
085-955900 CBL/INTEGRA POWER SWITCH 116-904600 SUPP/INTEGRA CARD SIDE
085-718400 PROBE/X10M12 116-904700 SUPP/INTEGRA CARD MOTHERBD
072-900200 FAN/12V DC 80 CFM 120MM X 32MM 122-900400 COPPER FOIL TAPE 1.5"
051-902200 BUMP/INTEGRA FOOT 129-9075E0 FRAME/INTEGRA 60 FRONT
049-903000 HANDLE/INTEGRA PARTS KIT 143-731001 BOX/4090/INTEGRA/1100/256 SHIPPING
046-900500 PLUG/BE490 CON BOX 163-900500 DISPLAY INTEGRA
045-902300 KNOB/INTEGRA ENCODER RAW 164-901800 GRAT/INTEGRA DISPLAY COLOR
045-902200 KNOB/INTEGRA ENCODER SMALL 222-918400 FLOPPY DRIVE TEAC FD-05HF
042-917500 COVER/INTEGRA REAR BLANK SINGLE 415-035400 INTEGRA PROCESSOR TESTED ASSY A6
042-916801 COVER/INTEGRA PLAIN 415-035500 INTEGRA FRONT PANEL TESTED ASSY
035-903900 BUTT/INTEGRA REC GREY 415-035700 INTEGRA MOTHER BOARD TESTED
035-903600 BUTT KEYMAT/INTEGRA 415-035800 INTEGRA OPTION BOARD TESTED
035-903500 BUTT/INTEGRA ROCKER 415-039700 INTEGRA 60 ACQUIS. TESTED 50K A7
024-057900 CON/ 2F HRL ID C TL R 415-039800 INTEGRA 60 ANALOG TESTED BRD
011-943101 BRKT/INTEGRA OPTION 1 426-004005 SOFT/PC UTILITIES V1.9
011-941200 BRKT/INTEGRA TIE BAR CENTER 445-013700 INTEGRA FDD OPTION ASSY
011-941100 BRKT/INTEGRA TIE BAR RIGHT 445-015600 INTEGRA 60 FRONT PANEL
011-940902 BRKT/INTEGRA FDD 619-006700 MAN SET/INTEGRA OPERATION
619-007200 MAN SET/INTEGRA REMOTE COMMAND
645-002600 INTEGRA 60 STD FRAME ASSY
Integra XY Option
826-008300 INTEGRA 10 OPTION XY MEASURE
121
Integra Thermal Writer (Option T) Integra Floppy (Option F)

011-941000 BRKT/INTEGR PLOTTER 011-940900 BRKT/INTEGRA FDD DRIVE
011-9432E0 BRKT/INTEGRA PLOTTER FAN 085-956100 CBL/INTEGRA FDD FLEX
034-907200 GUIDE/INTEGRA PLOTR BD 222-918400 FLOPPY DRIVE TEAC FD-05HF
035-903800 BUTT/INTEGRA WRITER GREY 445-013700 INTEGRA FDD OPTION ASSY
042-916900 COVER/INTEGRA W/ PLOTTER 845-049300 INTEGRA FDD OPTION
042-917300 COVER/INTEGRA PLOTTER LID
043-900600 STRIP/ANTI-STATIC BRUSH
068-9440E0 PAN/INTEGRA PLOTR SWITCH Integra Differential Inputs (Option D)
071-900800 HOLDER/INTEGRA PAPER ROLL PART NO. DESCRIPTION
072-900400 FAN/24VDC PLOTR 2.5X2.5X.6 044-923300 SHIELD/INTEGRA ANALOG COMP SIDE
085-9546E0 CBL/INTEGRA PLOTR PCB-CNTRL BD 044-923400 SHIELD/INTEGRA ANALOG SOLD SIDE
085-9549E1 CBL/INTEGRA PLOTR PCB-PLOTR 415-035600 INTEGRA ANALOG “DIFF” TESTED
132-900100 ROLLER/INTEGRA IDLING 845-047400 INTEGRA DIFF INPUTS OPTION
220-900100 PAPER/THERMAL ROLL FUJITSU
222-917800 THERMAL PRINTER HEAD
268-904700 MECH MISC/BEZEL INTEGRA PLOTTER Integra 2M RAM (Option 2M)
415-039400 INTEGRA WRITER DATA TESTED BRD
415-039500 INTEGRA WRITER SWITCH ASSY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
445-014000 INTEGRA WRITER OPTION ASSY 415-039300 INTEGRA D-RAM TESTED ASSY
845-047900 2 MEGAWORD MEMORY PER CHANNEL
Integra Battery Backed RAM (Option R)

Integra 1M RAM (Option 1M)
089-703500 BATT/NICAD 3.6V 3/V110H PART NO. DESCRIPTION
134-000300 IC/584000 512KX8 70 MPD 415-039300 INTEGRA D-RAM TESTED ASSY
845-048100 1 M BATTERY BACKED “RAM” DISK 845-047800 1 MEGAWORD MEMORY PER CHANNEL
Integra Option P Integra Thermal Plotter Paper

085-718300 PROBE/X1M12 220-900100 PAPER/THERMAL ROLL FUJITSU (Qty 1)
845-048900 INTEGRA OPTION P (2) 085-718300 016-900100 ACCESS/INTEGRA PAPER THERMAL (Qty 8)
Integra Option K
A6 845-047500 INTEGRA 10 50K WORD MEM OPTION
Integra Option H
A7 PART NO. DESCRIPTION
002-914500 PLATE/INTEGRA HD MOUNT
085-947100 CBL/IDE HARD DRIVE DATA
085-955001 CBL/INTEGRA HDD POWER
222-918300 HARD DRIVE 1.6GB IDE 3.5"
445-013800 INTEGRA HDD OPTION ASSY
845-048000 500 MB INTERNAL HARD DISK DRIVE
Integra GPIB (Option G)

011-943101 BRKT/INTEGRA OPTION 1
116-904700 SUPP/INTEGRA CARD MOTHERBD
415-035700 INTEGRA MOTHER BOARD TESTED
415-035800 INTEGRA OPTION BOARD TESTED
845-047600 INTEGRA 10 GPIB INTF OPTION
122

Nicolet Integra Manual

Transféré par

Informations du document

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Nicolet Integra Manual

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Nicolet

Nicolet Instrument Technologies

A3 Waveform File Specifications

Waveform File Specifications A3

Chapter 1: Getting Started Chapter 2: DSO Features

3.5.1.4 Pulse Width Trigger 42 3.12.3 Measurement Modes 80

Chapter 4: Integra Verification Procedure Appendix 4: Interfacing the DSO to an IBM-

Receiving IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY

THIS WARRANTY REPLACES ALL OTHER WAR-

Software Copyright Protection

1.1 Safety and Power Requirements 1.1.2 International Safety Warnings

1.1.1 Symbols and Terms Danish

This symbol is used to denote the measurement SIKKERHEDSADVARSEL

Älä poista suojakansia. Italiano

1.1.3 Safety Statement

1.1.5 Live Parts 1.1.7 Power and Frequency Requirements

1.1.8 EMC 1.1.9 Fuse Requirements

Save Plot Main Recall Measure

Figure 1.2a Controls on the Integra 10

(15) Trigger Level knob (30) DC/Gnd/AC button

Figure 1.2b Controls on the Integra 20

Save Plot Main Recall Measure

Figure 1.2c Controls on the Integra 40

Figure 1.2d Controls on the Integra 60

1.2 Using the Buttons 2V OFF OFF OFF 50µs

1.3 Start-Up Display

1.4.2 Manually Obtaining a Trace 1.5 Channel Controls

1.5.1 Channels and Traces 1.6 Horizontal Adjustments

Analysis menu can be accessed two ways. Either press the

Figure 1.6b Zoom Windows

1.6.3 Aliases 1.6.4 Equivalent Time Sampling

1.6.6 Zoom 1.6.7 External Clock

1.7 Vertical Adjustments 1.7.2 Position

1 The Position knobs (28) move their respective traces up and

1.8 Trigger Control 15

The Integra has very comprehensive trigger facilities; those TRIGGER

comprehensive trigger menu is described in Section 3.9. 10 10

When the instrument receives a valid trigger, the Trigger LED 20 10

(10) briefly illuminates to indicate that the instrument is

1.8.1 Selecting Trigger Source 1.8.3 Trigger Level (Integra 60)

1.8.5 Trigger Slope 1.9 Trigger Delay

In Auto mode, if no valid trigger signal has been received

If valid triggers are received at a rate of approximately 25 Hz

start of the display sweep, i.e. the left-hand edge of the 20 10

screen, and with pretrigger it indicates the trigger point. This

1.9.1 Pretrigger 1.9.2 Delay by Time

Figure 1.9b Trace Capture With Delay

1.10 Operating Hints 1.10.3 Problem:

1.10.5 Problem: 1.10.8 Problem:

2.1 DSO FEATURES 2.1.2 The Hold Last Button

Hold Last pressed

Hold Last pressed

2.1.3 The Hold Next Button 2.1.4 The Hold Mode

Hold Next pressed

Hold Next pressed

2.2 Guarding Stored Data 2.3.2 Roll Mode

2.4 Cursors CURSORS

2 2.4.1 Cursor and Reference Selection

Figure 2.5.1 Thermal Plotter Paper Loading

3.1 The Menus 3.1.2 Entering User Names or Numbers

3.1.1 Definitions 3.1.4 The Main Operation Buttons

highlighted item is.

Ref CH1 CH2 LF HF Auto

Menu V/DIV V/DIV V/DIV